MX2015005564A

MX2015005564A - Absorbent article.

Info

Publication number: MX2015005564A
Application number: MX2015005564A
Authority: MX
Inventors: David Fleger Bishop; Niall Finn; Scott S C Kirby; Andy R Butler; Andrew Thomas Hammond; Michael John Faulks; Heather Ann Diffey
Original assignee: Kimberly Clark Co
Priority date: 2012-10-31
Filing date: 2013-10-30
Publication date: 2015-08-20
Also published as: MX347502B; AR098243A1; WO2014070829A1; RU2015120483A; KR20150081318A; BR112015009451A2; AU2013337991B2; KR102200393B1; AU2013337991A1; RU2614325C2

Abstract

An absorbent article having improved handling of body exudates. The absorbent article can minimize the amount of body exudates in contact with a wearer's skin and can minimize the incidence of leakage of body exudates from the absorbent article.

Description

ABSORBENT ARTICLE BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION A primary function of absorbent articles for personal care is to absorb and retain body exudates such as urine, fecal material, blood, and menstruation with additional desired attributes that include low leakage of the absorbent article exudates and a feeling of dryness of the absorbent article for the carrier. To accomplish these tasks, the absorbent articles for personal care generally have an absorbent core and a cover enclosing the absorbent core. The cover is generally fluid permeable on the body facing side of the absorbent and fluid impermeable core on the garment-facing side of the absorbent core. Absorbent articles commonly fail, however, to prevent leakage of body exudates. Some body exudates, such as solid and semi-solid faecal material and menstruation, have difficulty penetrating the body-oriented material of the absorbent article as easily as low viscosity exudates, such as urine, and tend to spread through the body. surface of the material oriented towards the body. Such spread of body exudates can lead to leakage of exudates Ref. : 256483 bodily from the absorbent article.

Semi-solid faecal material, such as low viscosity faecal material that may be common in younger children, and menstruation may be especially difficult to contain in an absorbent article. These exudates can circulate in the material facing the body of an absorbent article under the influence of gravity, movement and pressure by the carrier of the absorbent article. The migration of the exudates is often towards the perimeter of the absorbent article, which increases the likelihood of leakage and embarrassment against the skin of the wearer which can make the cleaning of the skin difficult. Even if the migration of the exudates is minimized in the body-oriented material, another challenge to contain the semisolid faecal material, menstruation, as well as other body exudates, is to efficiently distribute such exudates through the absorbent structure of the absorbent article. .

In the past, attempts have been made to provide body-oriented material to an absorbent article that can solve the problems described above. One of these approaches has been the use of various types of embossing to create bulkiness on the body-facing surface of the absorbent article. This approach, however, requires base weight material high to create a structure with significant topography. Furthermore, it is inherent in the etching process that the starting thickness of the material is lost due to the fact that the engraving is, by its nature, a compression and joining process. In addition, to "fix" the embossments on a non-woven fabric, the densified section typically fuses to create weld spots that are typically impervious to the passage of body exudates. Therefore, a part of the area is lost so that the body exudates pass through the material. In addition, the "fixation" of the fabric can cause the material to harden and become rough to the touch.

Another approach has been to form fibrous webs on three-dimensional conformation surfaces. The resulting structures usually have low resilience capacity with low base weights (it is assumed that soft fibers with desirable aesthetic attributes are used) and the topography is significantly degraded when they are wound on a roll and subjected to subsequent conversion processes. This is partly in the process of three-dimensional shaping by allowing the three-dimensional shape to be filled with fiber. This, however, is typically achieved at a higher cost due to the use of more material. This also results in a loss of softness and the resulting material becomes aesthetically unattractive for certain applications.

Another approach has been to drill a fibrous web. In depending on the process, this can generate a flat two-dimensional plot or a plot with a bit of bulkiness where the displaced fiber is pushed out of the plane of the original frame. Typically, the extension of the bulk is limited and, under sufficient load, the displaced fiber can be pushed back to its original position resulting in at least partial closure of the opening. The opening processes that try to "fix" the displaced fiber out of the plane of the original weft are also prone to degradation of the softness of the starting fabric. Another problem with perforated materials is that when they are incorporated into final products such as with the use of adhesives, due to their open structure, adhesives often easily penetrate through the openings in the material from their lower exposed surface to the upper one. , which thus creates undesired problems such as the accumulation of adhesive in the conversion process or the creation of unwanted joints between the layers within the finished product.

Attempts have also been made to assist in the distribution of body exudates throughout an absorbent structure by the use of acquisition layers and fluid transfer layers that are placed between the absorbent body and the body oriented materials. Although such layers of acquisition and transfer of fluid can distribute some exudates at a two-dimensional level in the longitudinal and latitudinal directions on the body-facing surface of the absorbent body, these acquisition and fluid transfer layers provide little benefit of distribution towards the lateral or garment-facing surfaces of the body. absorbent body.

There is still a need for an absorbent article that can adequately reduce the incidence of leakage of body exudates from the absorbent article. There is still a need for an absorbent article that can provide better handling of body exudates. There is still a need for an absorbent article that can minimize the amount of body exudates in contact with the skin of the wearer. There is still a need for an absorbent article that can more effectively distribute body exudates throughout the absorbent structure. There is still a need for an absorbent article that can provide physical and emotional comfort for the wearer of the absorbent article.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION In one embodiment, an absorbent article may include a body oriented material that includes a first major surface and a second major surface. The second main surface may be opposite to the first main surface. The absorbent article may include an outer coating impervious to liquids and an absorbent body. The absorbent body may include a body facing surface, a garment facing surface, a first longitudinal side edge, and a second longitudinal side edge. The second longitudinal side edge may be opposite the first longitudinal side edge. The body-oriented material can at least partially envelop the absorbent body so that the material facing the body is positioned on at least a portion of the surface facing the body of the absorbent body, extending around at least one of the first longitudinal side edge and the second longitudinal side edge of the absorbent body, and extends below at least a portion of the garment facing surface of the absorbent body. At least a portion of the body facing material extending below the garment-facing surface of the absorbent body can contact the body facing surface of the liquid impervious outer covering.

In another embodiment, an absorbent article may include a body oriented material having a first major surface and a second major surface. The second main surface may be opposite to the first Main surface and a plurality of projections may extend from one of the first major surface and the second major surface. The absorbent article may also include an outer coating impervious to liquids and an absorbent body. The absorbent body may include a body facing surface, a garment facing surface, a first longitudinal side edge, and a second longitudinal side edge. The second longitudinal side edge may be opposite the first longitudinal side edge. The body-oriented material can at least partially envelop the absorbent body so that the material facing the body is positioned on at least a portion of the surface facing the body of the absorbent body, extending around at least one of the first longitudinal side edge and the second longitudinal side edge of the absorbent body, and extends below at least a portion of the garment facing surface of the absorbent body.

In yet another embodiment, an absorbent article may include a body oriented material, an outer liquid impervious covering, an absorbent body, and a first fluid transfer layer. The absorbent body may include a body-facing surface, a garment-oriented surface, a first longitudinal side edge, and a second longitudinal side edge. The absorbent body can be disposed between the material facing the body and the outer covering. The first fluid transfer layer can include a first major surface, a second major surface, and a plurality of projections extending from one of the first major surface and the second major surface. The first main surface may be facing the second main surface. The first fluid transfer layer can at least partially envelop the absorbent body so that the first fluid transfer layer is positioned on at least a first portion of the surface facing the body of the absorbent body, extending around the first edge longitudinal side of the absorbent body, and extends below at least a first portion of the surface facing the garment of the absorbent body.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES Figure 1 is a side view illustration of an embodiment of an absorbent article.

Figure 2 is a top-down view of an embodiment of an absorbent article with portions omitted for clarity.

Figure 3 is an exploded cross-sectional view of one embodiment of an absorbent article.

Figure 4 is an exploded cross-sectional view of another embodiment of an absorbent article.

Figure 5 is an exploded cross-sectional view of another embodiment of an absorbent article.

Figure 6 is an exploded cross-sectional view of another embodiment of an absorbent article.

Figure 7 is a perspective cross-sectional view of another embodiment of an absorbent article.

Figure 8 is an exploded cross-sectional view taken along line 8-8 of Figure 7.

Figure 9 is an exploded cross-sectional view similar to Figure 8, but showing an alternative embodiment.

Figure 10 is a perspective cross-sectional view of another embodiment of an absorbent article.

Figure 11 is an exploded cross-sectional view taken along line 11-11 of Figure 10.

Figure 12 is an exploded cross-sectional view similar to Figure 11, but showing an alternative embodiment.

Figure 13 is an exploded perspective view showing the illustrative joining of the components of the absorbent article similar to the embodiment shown in Figure 12, wherein the absorbent body is hourglass-shaped and the third fluid transfer layer HE Removed for purposes of clarity.

Figure 14A is an exploded perspective view showing another illustrative joint of the components of an illustrative absorbent article similar to the absorbent article shown in Figure 12, wherein the absorbent body includes a plurality of holes and the third transfer layer of the absorbent article. Fluids were removed for clarity purposes.

Figure 14B is an exploded perspective view showing another illustrative attachment of the components of an illustrative absorbent article similar to the absorbent article shown in Figure 14A, wherein the secondary coating includes a plurality of openings and the third transfer layer of the absorbent article. Fluids were removed for clarity purposes.

Figure 15 is an exploded perspective view showing the illustrative joining of the components of an absorbent article similar to the illustrative embodiment shown in Figures 7 and 8, wherein the separator layer is positioned against the garment facing surface of the article. absorbent body.

Figure 16A is an exploded perspective view showing another illustrative joint of the components of an illustrative absorbent article similar to the absorbent article shown in Figure 15.

Figure 16B is an exploded perspective view showing another illustrative attachment of the components of an illustrative absorbent article similar to the absorbent article shown in Figure 15.

Figure 17 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a material facing the body.

Figure 18 is a cross-sectional view of the body oriented material of Figure 17 taken along line 18-18.

Figure 19 is a cross-sectional view of the body-oriented material of Figure 17 taken along line 18-18 of Figure 17 showing the possible directions of fiber movements within the material facing the body. body due to a fluid entanglement process.

Figure 20 is a photomicrograph at a 45 degree angle showing a body oriented material entangled by fluid.

Figures 20A and 20B are photomicrographs showing a cross section of a material facing the body.

Figure 21A is a top-down view of an illustrative embodiment of a projection layer of a material facing the body in which two projections are partially aligned with each other.

Figure 2IB is a top-down view of an illustrative embodiment of a layer of projections of a material facing the body in which two projections are completely aligned with each other.

Figure 21C is a top-down view of an illustrative embodiment of a projection layer of a material facing the body in which two projections do not align with each other at all.

Figure 22 is a schematic side view of an apparatus and a process for forming a fluid-oriented body-oriented material.

Figure 22A is an exploded view of a portion representative of a projection forming surface.

Figure 23 is a schematic side view of an alternative embodiment of an apparatus and a process for forming a fluid-oriented body-oriented material.

Figure 24 is a schematic side view of an alternative embodiment of an apparatus and a process for forming a fluid-oriented body-oriented material. The apparatus and process illustrated in Figure 24 is an adaptation of the apparatus and process illustrated in Figure 23 as well as the subsequent Figures 25 and 27.

Figure 25 is a schematic side view of an alternative embodiment of an apparatus and a process for forming a material oriented towards the body entangled by fluid.

Figure 26 is a schematic side view of an alternative embodiment of an apparatus and a process for forming a fluid-oriented body-oriented material.

Figure 27 is a schematic side view of an alternative embodiment of an apparatus and a process for forming a fluid-oriented body-oriented material.

Figure 28 is a perspective view of one embodiment of an absorbent article.

Figure 29 is a top-down view of an embodiment of an absorbent article.

Figure 30 is a perspective view of an example illustration of a configuration of an imaging system that is used to determine the percentage of open area.

Figure 31 is a perspective view of an example illustration of a configuration of an imaging system that is used for determining the height of the projections.

Figure 32 is a graph representing the thickness of the fabric as a function of the supercharging ratio of the projection layer in a shaping process.

Figure 33 is a graph representing the extension of the fabric to a load of 10 N as a function of the supercharging ratio of the projection layer in the process of shaping the materials oriented towards the body and the layers of projections without support.

Figure 34 is a graph representing the loading in Newton by 50 mm in width as a function of the percentage of extension by comparing a material oriented towards the body and a layer of unsupported projections.

Figure 35 is a graph representing the load in Newton by 50 mm in width as a function of the percentage of extension for a series of materials oriented towards the body, while the overfeeding ratio varies.

Figure 36 is a graph representing the load in Newton by 50 mm in width as a function of the percentage of extension for a series of 45 g / m2 projection layers, while the overfeed ratio varies.

Figure 37 is a top-view photomicrograph of a sample designated as code 3-6 in Table 1 of the description.

Figure 37A is a photomicrograph of a sample designated as code 3-6 in Table 1 of the description taken at a 45 degree angle.

Figure 38 is a photomicrograph in top view of a sample designated as code 5-3 in Table 1 of the description.

Figure 38A is a photomicrograph of a sample designated as code 5-3 in Table 1 of the description taken at a 45 degree angle.

Figure 39 is a photomicrograph showing the juxtaposition of a portion of a material facing the body with and without a support layer supporting the projection layer processed simultaneously in the same apparatus.

Figure 40 is a perspective view of an example illustration of a configuration of a Digital Thickness Meter.

Figure 41 is a side view of an example illustration of a configuration of an injection apparatus.

Figure 42 is a perspective view of an example illustration of a configuration of the injection apparatus of Figure 41.

Figure 43 is a perspective view of an example illustration of a configuration of an imaging system.

Figure 44 is a top view of an example illustration of a configuration of a vacuum box.

Figure 45 is a side view of the example illustration of the vacuum box of Figure 44.

Figure 46 is a rear view of the example illustration of the vacuum box of Figure 44.

Figure 47 is a graph representing the propagation area of fecal material simulant over several absorbent compounds.

Figure 48 is a graph representing the propagation area of fecal material simulant over various absorbent compounds.

Figure 49 is a graph representing the propagation area of fecal material simulant over various absorbent compounds.

Figure 50 is a graph representing the amount of residual fecal material simulant on various absorbent compounds.

Figure 51 is a graph representing the amount of simulant of residual faecal material on various absorbent composites.

Figure 52 is a graph depicting the amount of simulant of residual faecal material on various absorbent composites.

Figure 53 is a graph representing the amount of residual fecal material simulant on various absorbent compounds.

Figure 54 is a graph showing the compression stress as a function of the thickness of a layer of unsupported projections and two materials oriented towards the body under a loading and unloading of a cycle.

Figure 55 is a graph representing the load (N / 25 mm) as a function of the percent extension for a layer of projections without support and two different materials oriented towards the body.

Figure 56 is a top-down view of a speed block mode.

Figure 56A is a cross-sectional view of the speed block of Figure 56.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION In one embodiment, the present disclosure is generally directed toward an absorbent article that can have better handling of body exudates. In one embodiment, the present disclosure is generally directed toward an absorbent article having a material facing the body that may have hollow projections extending from a material surface facing the body. Without being bound by the theory, it is believed that various attributes can be achieved by providing hollow projections to the material oriented towards the body. First, by providing a body oriented material with hollow projections, the material facing the body can have a greater degree of thickness while minimizing the amount of material used. The increased thickness of the material facing the body can improve the separation of the skin of the absorbent body carrier from an absorbent article, thus improving the perspective of drier skin. Through the provision of projections, areas can be created of contact between the projections that can temporarily distance body exudates from the high points of the projections, while the body exudates can be absorbed by the absorbent article. By providing projections, therefore, skin contact with body exudates can be reduced and provide better skin benefits. Secondly, by the provision of projections, the propagation of the body exudates in the material facing the body of the absorbent article can be reduced which thus exposes the skin to contamination less. Third, by reducing contact with the skin in general, a body-oriented material with projections can provide a softer feeling to the skin in contact thereby improving the tactile aesthetics of the material facing the body and the absorbent article. . Fourth, when the materials with the projections are used as a body-oriented material for an absorbent article, the material facing the body can also serve the function of acting as a cleaning aid when the absorbent article is removed of the carrier In addition, in some embodiments, the body-oriented material may extend below at least a portion of the garment-facing surface of the absorbent body to improve the distribution of body exudates toward the body absorbent.

Definitions: The term "absorbent article" refers herein to an article that can be placed against or in proximity to the body (i.e., contiguous to the body) of the carrier to absorb and contain different liquid, solid and semi-solid exudates expelled from the body. Absorbents, as described herein, are intended to be disposed of after a limited period of use rather than being washed or otherwise restored for re-use.It is to be understood that the present disclosure is applicable to various disposable absorbent articles, including, but not limited to, diapers, training pants, youth pants, swim shorts, feminine hygiene products, including, but not limited to, menstrual pads, incontinence products, medical garments, surgical pads and bandages , other garments for personal care or health care, and the like without departing from the scope of this description.

The term "acquisition layer" refers herein to a layer capable of accepting and temporarily maintaining liquid body exudates to decelerate and diffuse an influx or stream of liquid body exudates and subsequently release liquid body exudates from the body.

It is in another layer or layers of the absorbent article.

The terms "attached" or "union" refer herein to bonding, bonding, connecting, bonding, or the like of two elements. Two elements will be considered united when they are linked, adhered, connected, linked or similar directly to each other or indirectly to each other, such as when each element is linked directly to intermediate elements.

The term "carded web" refers herein to a web containing natural or synthetic short fibers typically having fiber lengths of less than about 100 mm. The short fiber bales can be subjected to an opening process to separate the fibers that are then sent to a carding process that separates and combs the fibers to align them in the machine direction after which the fibers are deposited on a wire mobile for further processing. Such webs are generally subjected to some type of bonding process such as thermal bonding by the use of pressure and / or heat. In addition or instead, the fibers can be subjected to adhesive processes to bond the fibers together as by the use of powdered adhesives. The carded web can be subjected to entanglement by fluid, such as hydroentanglement, to further entangle the fibers and thereby improve the integrity of the carded web. The carded frames, due to the alignment of the fibers in the direction of the machine, once joined, will typically have more resistance in the machine direction than resistance in the machine's transverse direction.

The term "film" refers herein to a thermoplastic film made by the use of extrusion and / or other forming process, such as cast film or film extrusion processes. The term includes perforated films, slit films, and other porous films that constitute liquid transfer films, as well as films that do not transfer fluids, such as, but not limited to, barrier films, filled films , breathable films, and oriented movies.

The term "fluid entangled" and "entangled by fluid" refers herein to a shaping process to further increase the degree of entanglement of the fibers within a given non-woven fibrous web or between fibrous non-woven webs and others. materials so that the separation of the fibers and / or individual layers is more difficult as a result of entanglement. Generally this is achieved by supporting the nonwoven fibrous web in some type of shaping or conveying surface having at least some degree of permeability to the fluid at incident pressure.

A jet of pressurized fluid (usually multiple jets) can then be directed against the surface of the nonwoven web opposite to the supported surface of the web. The pressurized fluid comes into contact with the fibers and pushes parts of the fibers in the direction of fluid flow thereby displacing all or a portion of a plurality of the fibers towards the supported surface of the web. The result is an additional entanglement of the fibers in what can be called the Z direction of the weft (its thickness) with respect to its flattest dimension, its XY plane. When two or more separate webs or other layers are placed adjacent to each other on the forming / transporting surface and subjected to pressurized fluid, the desired result is generally that some of the fibers of at least one of the webs are pushed. into the adjacent web or layer, thus causing tangling of the fibers between the interfaces of the two surfaces in order to result in the joining or bonding of the webs / layers together due to the greater entanglement of the fibers. The degree of bonding or entanglement will depend on a number of factors including, but not limited to, the types of fibers that are used, the lengths of the fibers, the degree of pre-junction or entanglement of the weft or webs before clamping process of fluid entanglement, the type of fluid used (liquids, such as water, gases or vapor, such as air), the pressure of the fluid, the number of fluid jets, the speed of the processes, the residence time of the fluid and the porosity of the weft or frames / other layers and the conformation / transport surface. One of the most common fluid entanglement processes is known as hydroentanglement, which is a process well known to those skilled in the art of nonwoven webs. Examples of fluid entanglement processes can be found in U.S. Pat. 4,939,016 to Radwanski et al., U.S. Patent No. 3,485,706 to Evans, and U.S. Patent Nos. 4,970,104 and 4,959,531 to Radwanski, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety thereto for all purposes.

The term "g / cc" refers herein to grams per cubic centimeter.

The term "g / m2" refers herein to grams per square meter.

The term "hydrophilic" refers herein to fibers or fiber surfaces that are wetted by aqueous liquids in contact with the fibers. The degree of wetting of the materials can, in turn, be described in terms of the contact angles and the surface tensions of the liquids and materials involved. The equipment and techniques suitable for measuring the wettability of particular fiber materials or mixtures of fiber materials can provided by the Cahn SFA-222 Surface Force Analyzer System, or a substantially equivalent system. When measured with this system, fibers having contact angles of less than 90 are designated as "wettable" or hydrophilic, and fibers having contact angles greater than 90 are designated as "non-wettable" or hydrophobic.

The term "impervious to liquids" refers herein to a multilayer layer or laminate in which liquid body exudates, such as urine, will not pass through the layer or laminate, under ordinary conditions of use, into a direction generally perpendicular to the plane of the layer or laminate at the point of contact with the liquid.

The term "liquid permeable" refers herein to any material that is not impervious to liquids.

As used herein, the term "blow-melt" refers herein to fibers that are formed by extrusion of a molten thermoplastic material through a series of thin, generally circular, punched capillaries such as fused filaments or filaments. a convergent jet of high velocity gas (e.g., air) that attenuates the filaments of the molten thermoplastic material, in order to reduce its diameter, which may be a microfiber diameter. Therefore, the fibers fused by Blown are transported by a high velocity jet of gas and are deposited on a collection surface, so as to form a continuous web of randomly distributed blown fibers. Such a process is described, for example, in U.S. Pat. 3,849,241 to Butin et al., Which is incorporated herein by reference. The blown fibers are microfibers that can be continuous or discontinuous, are generally smaller than approximately denier 0.6, and can be adherent and self-adhering when deposited on a collection surface.

The term "non-woven" refers herein to materials and webs that are formed without the aid of a knitting or weaving process. The materials and the webs of materials can have a structure of individual fibers, filaments, or yarns (collectively referred to as "fibers") that can cross-link, but not in an identifiable manner as in a knitted fabric. Non-woven materials or fabrics can be formed from many processes such as, but not limited to, blow-melt processes, spin-jointing processes, carded weft processes, etc.

The term "collapsible" refers herein to materials that are adaptable and that will easily conform to the general shape and contours of the wearer's body.

The term "spunbond" refers herein to small diameter fibers which are formed by extruding molten thermoplastic material as filaments from a plurality of fine capillaries of a row having a circular or other configuration, with the diameter of the extruded filaments which are then rapidly reduced by a conventional process, such as, for example, evacuation extraction, and the processes described in U.S. Patent No. 4,340,563 to Appel et al., the United States patent. U.S. Patent No. 3,692,618 to Dorschner et al., U.S. Patent No. 3,802,817 to Matsuki et al., U.S. Pat. 3,338,992 and 3,341,394 to Kinncy, U.S. Patent No. 3,502,763 to Hartmann, U.S. Patent No. 3,502,538 to Peterson, and U.S. Patent No. 3,542,615 to Dobo et al., Each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Spunbond fibers are generally continuous and often have average denier greater than about 0.3, and in one embodiment, between about 0.6, 5 and 10 and about 15, 20 and 40. Spunbonded fibers are generally not adherent when deposited on a collection surface.

The term "superabsorbent" refers herein to an organic or inorganic material, swellable in water, insoluble in water capable, under the most favorable conditions, of absorbing at least about 15 times its weight and, in one embodiment, at least about 30 times its weight, in an aqueous solution containing 0.9 weight percent of sodium chloride. The superabsorbent materials can be polymers and natural, synthetic and modified natural materials. In addition, the superabsorbent materials may be inorganic materials, such as silica gels, or organic compounds, such as cross-linked polymers.

The term "thermoplastic" refers herein to a material that softens and that can be formed when exposed to heat and that returns substantially to a non-soft state when cooled.

Absorbing Article: With reference to Figure 1, a disposable absorbent article 10 of the present disclosure is exemplified in the form of a diaper. It is to be understood that the present disclosure is suitable for use with various other personal care absorbent articles, such as, for example, feminine hygiene products, without departing from the scope of the present disclosure. Although the embodiments and illustrations described herein can generally be applied to absorbent articles made in the longitudinal direction of the product, which is referred to hereinafter as the manufacture of a product in the machine direction, it should be borne in mind that an expert could apply the information here for absorbent articles manufactured in the latitudinal direction of the product, which is hereinafter referred to as manufacturing a product in the transverse direction without departing from the spirit and scope of the description. The absorbent article 10 illustrated in Figure 1 includes a front region of the waist 12, a back region of the waist 14, and a crotch region 16 interconnecting the front and rear waist regions, 12 and 14, respectively. The absorbent article 10 has a pair of longitudinal side edges, 18 and 20 (shown in Figure 2), and a pair of opposite waist edges, respectively designated front edge of the waist 22 and trailing edge of the waist 24. The forward region of the waist 12 may be contiguous with the leading edge of the waist 22 and the rear region of the waist 14 may be contiguous with the trailing edge of the waist 24.

With reference to Figure 2, a non-limiting illustration of an absorbent article 10, such as, for example, a diaper, is illustrated in a top view, with parts omitted for reasons of clarity from the illustration. The absorbent article 10 may include an outer covering 26 and a material facing the body 28. In one embodiment, the material facing the body 28 may joining the outer covering 26 in a superposed relationship by any suitable means such as, but not limited to, adhesives, ultrasonic bonds, thermal bonds, pressure bonds, or other conventional techniques. The outer covering 26 may define a length, or longitudinal direction 30, and a width, or lateral direction 32, which, in the illustrated embodiment, may coincide with the length and width of the absorbent article 10. The longitudinal direction 30 and the direction side 32 of the absorbent article 10, and of the materials forming the absorbent article 10, can provide the XY planes, respectively, of the absorbent article 10 and of the materials forming the absorbent article 10. The absorbent article 10, and the materials that they form the absorbent article 10, they can also have a Z direction. A measurement, taken under pressure, in the Z direction of a material forming the absorbent article 10 can provide a measure of the thickness of the material. A measurement, taken under pressure, in the Z direction of the absorbent article 10 can provide a measure of the volume of the absorbent article 10.

With reference to Figures 2-16, an absorbent body 40 may be disposed between the outer covering 26 and the material facing the body 28. The absorbent body 40 may have longitudinal edges, 42 and 44, which, in one embodiment, may form portions of the longitudinal side edges, 18 and 20, respectively, of the absorbent article 10 and may have opposite end edges, 46 and 48, which, in one embodiment, may form portions of the edges of the waist, and 24, respectively, of the absorbent article 10. In one embodiment, the absorbent body 40 can have a length and width that are the same or less than the length and width of the absorbent article 10. In one embodiment, a pair of fins of containment, 50 and 52, may be present and may inhibit the lateral flow of body exudates.

The front region of the waist 12 may include the portion of the absorbent article 10 which, when worn, is placed at least in part, on the front of the wearer, while the back region of the waist 14 may include the portion of the article. absorbent 10 which, when used, is placed at least partly on the back of the carrier. The crotch region 16 of the absorbent article 10 may include the portion of the absorbent article 10, which, when worn, is placed between the legs of the wearer and may partially cover the lower torso of the wearer. The edges of the waist, 22 and 24, of the absorbent article 10 are configured to surround the waist of the wearer and together define the central opening of the waist 54 (as shown in Figure 1). The portions of the edges longitudinal side, 1188 and 2200, in the crotch region 16 may define generally leg openings 56 (such as shown in Figure 1) when the absorbent article 10 is used.

The absorbent article 10 can be configured to contain and / or absorb liquid, solid, and semi-solid body exudates expelled by the carrier. For example, the containment fins, 50 and 52, can be configured to provide a barrier to the lateral flow of body exudates. An elastic fin member, 58 and 60, may be operatively attached to each containment fin, 50 and 52, in any suitable manner known in the art. The elasticized containment fins, 50 and 52, can define a partially unbonded edge that can assume a vertical configuration in at least the crotch region 16 of the absorbent article 10 to form a seal against the body of the wearer. The containment fins, 50 and 52, may be located along the longitudinal side edges 18 and 20 of the absorbent article 10, and may extend longitudinally along the entire length of the absorbent article 10 or may extend partially along the length of the absorbent article 10. of the length of the absorbent article 10. Suitable constructions and arrangements for containment fins, 50 and 52, are generally well known to those skilled in the art and are described in FIG.

U.S. Patent Nos. 4,704,116 issued November 3, 1987 to Enloe and 5,562,650 issued October 8, 1996 to Everett et al., which are incorporated herein by reference.

In various embodiments, the absorbent article 10 may include a secondary liner 34 (as exemplified in Figures 4, 6, and 11-14). In such embodiments, the secondary liner 34 may have a body facing surface 36 and a garment facing surface 38. In such embodiments, the body facing material 28 may be attached to the body facing surface 36 of the secondary liner. 3. 4.

To further improve the containment and / or absorption of body exudates, the absorbent article 10 can suitably include a front elastic waist member 62, a waist elastic back member 64, and elastic leg members, 66 and 68 , as known to experts in the field. The elastic waist members, 62 and 64, can be connected to the outer covering 26, the body facing material 28, and / or the secondary coating 34 along the opposite waist edges, 22 and 24, and can extend over some or all of the edges of the waist, 22 and 24. The elastic leg members, 66 and 68, can be attached to the outer covering 26, body facing material 28, secondary coating 34, and / or containment fins 50, 52 along opposite longitudinal side edges, 18 and 20, and positioning in the crotch region 16 of the absorbent article 10.

In various embodiments, the body facing material 28 of an absorbent article 10 can have a load of more than about 2 Newton per 25 mm width to 10% extension in the machine direction as measured by the use of the Test method Charging method based on the percent extension that is described herein. In various embodiments, the body-oriented material 28 may have projections having a height greater than about 1 mm, as measured by the use of the method of testing Method for determining the height of the projections described herein. In various embodiments, the body-oriented material 28 of an absorbent article 10 can have a resilience of more than about 70% as measured by the use of the test method Resilience percent after compression of a cycle described in FIG. the present. In various embodiments, the amount of residual fecal material simulant in the body facing material 28 of an absorbent article 10 after an assault with fecal material simulant may be less than about 2.5. grams as measured by using the test method of simulating residual fecal material simulation described herein. In various embodiments, the propagation area of the fecal material simulant on the body facing material 28 of an absorbent article 10 after an assault with fecal material simulant can be less than about 34 cm2 as measured by the method of determining the Propagation area of the fecal material simulant described herein. In various embodiments, the body-oriented material 28 may have projections 90 having less than about 1% open area in a selected area of the material facing the body 28 as measured by the use of the method of testing. Method for determining the percent open area that is described here. In various embodiments, the body-oriented material 28 may have a contact area 116 that may have more than about 1% open area in a selected area of the material facing the body 28 as measured by the use of the test method Method to determine percent open area that is described herein. In various embodiments, the admission time for a second admission through a body-oriented material 28 in an absorbent article 10 after an assault with a menstruation simulator may be less than that of articles. commercially available absorbers as measured by the use of the Admission / Rewet test method described herein. In various embodiments, the admission time for a second admission through a body-oriented material 28 in an absorbent article 10 may be from about 25 or 30% to about 50, 60 or 70% less than the commercially available products after of an assault with a menstruation simulator as measured by the use of the Admission / Rewet test method described herein. In various embodiments, the admission time for a second admission through a body-oriented material 28 in an absorbent article 10 may be less than about 30 seconds after an assault of a menstrual simulant as measured by the use of the Admission / Rewet test method described herein. In various embodiments, the body-oriented material 28 may have a contact area 116 with a percentage of open area greater than the percentage of open area of a projection 90 as measured according to the test method. Method for determining the percent open area that is described here.

Additional details with respect to each of these elements of the absorbent article 10 described herein can be found below and with reference to the figures .

Exterior coating: The outer covering 26 can be breathable and / or impervious to liquids. The outer covering 26 may be elastic, stretchable or non-stretchable. The outer covering 26 may be constructed of a single layer, multiple layers, laminates, spun-bonded fabrics, films, blow-molded fabrics, elastic mesh, microporous wefts, heat-bonded carded webs or foams, which are provided by polymeric or elastomeric materials. In one embodiment, for example, outer coating 26 may be constructed of a microporous polymeric film, such as polyethylene or polypropylene.

In one embodiment, the outer covering 26 may be suitably stretchable, and more suitably resilient, at least in the circumferential or lateral direction 32 of the absorbent article 10. In one embodiment, the outer covering 26 may be stretchable, and more adequately elastic, both in the lateral 32 and longitudinal directions 30. In one embodiment, the outer covering 26 may be a single layer of a liquid impermeable material, such as the embodiments shown in Figures 7-9. In one embodiment, the outer covering 26 may be a multilayer laminate in which at least one of the layers is impermeable to the liquids. In one embodiment as illustrated in Figures 3-6 and 10-12, the outer covering 26 can be a two-layer construction, which includes an outer layer material 70 and an inner layer material 72 that can be joined together such as by means of a laminated adhesive. Suitable laminated adhesives can be applied continuously or intermittently in the form of beads, an atomization, parallel swirls, or the like. Suitable adhesives can be obtained from Bostik Findlay Adhesives, Inc. of Wauwatosa, Wisconsin, United States. It is to be understood that the inner layer 72 can be attached to the outer layer 70 by the use of ultrasonic joints, thermal joints, pressure joints, or the like.

The outer layer 70 of the outer covering 26 can be any suitable material and can be one that provides the wearer with a texture or overall appearance more similar to the fabric. An example of such material can be a 100% polypropylene heat-adhered woven web with a rhombic bond pattern available from Sandler AG, Germany, such as 30 g / m2 Sawabond 4185® or an equivalent. Another example of a material suitable for use as an outer layer 70 of an outer covering 26 may be a nonwoven web of 20 g / m2 spin-jointed polypropylene. The outer layer 70 can also be constructed of the same materials that the coating can be constructed secondary 34 as described herein.

The liquid impermeable inner layer 72 of the outer coating 26 (or the liquid impermeable outer coating 26, where the outer coating 26 is of a single layer construction) may be either vapor permeable (ie, "breathable"). ") or steamproof. The liquid impervious inner layer 72 (or the liquid impervious outer covering 26, where the outer covering 26 is of a single layer construction) can be fabricated from a thin plastic film, although other materials can also be used impervious to liquids. The liquid impervious inner layer 72 (or the liquid impervious outer covering 26, where the outer covering 26 is of a single layer construction) can prevent liquid body exudates from escaping the absorbent article 10 and moisten the articles , such as sheets and clothes, as well as the carrier and the caregiver. An example of a material for an inner layer impervious to liquids 72 (or the liquid impervious outer covering 26, where the outer covering 26 is of a single layer construction) can be a Berry Plastics XP-8695H printed film of 19 g / m2 or a commercially available equivalent of Berry Plastics Corporation, Evansville, Indiana, United States United.

Where the outer covering 26 is of a single layer construction, it may be embossed and / or matte to provide a texture or appearance more similar to the fabric. The outer coating 26 can allow vapors to escape from the absorbent article 10 while preventing the passage of liquids. A suitable liquid impervious, vapor permeable material can be composed of a microporous polymer film or a nonwoven material that is coated or otherwise treated to impart the desired level of liquid impermeability.

Absorbent Body: The absorbent body 40 can be suitably constructed to be generally compressible, adaptable, collapsible, non-irritating to the skin of the wearer and capable of absorbing and retaining liquid body exudates. The absorbent body 40 can be manufactured in a wide variety of sizes and shapes (e.g., rectangular, trapezoidal, T-shaped, I-shaped, hourglass-shaped, etc.) and a wide variety of materials. The size and absorbent capacity of the absorbent body 40 must be compatible with the size of the intended carrier and the liquid load imparted by the intended use of the absorbent article 10. In addition, the size and absorbent capacity of the absorbent body 40 can be varied to accommodate to carriers ranging from babies to adults.

The absorbent body 40 can have a length ranging from about 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 200, 210, 220, 225, 230, 240, 250, 260, 270, 280, 290, 300, 310, 320, 330, 340, or 350 mm to about 355, 360, 380, 385, 390, 395, 400, 410, 415, 420, 425, 440, 450, 460, 480, 500, 510, or 520 mm. The absorbent body 40 can have a crotch width ranging from about 30, 40, 50, 55, 60, 65, or 70 mm to about 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 105, 110, 115, 120, 125, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170 or 180 mm. The width of the absorbent body 40 located within the front region of the waist 12 and / or the rear region of the waist 14 of the absorbent article 10 may vary from about 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, or 95 mm to about 100, 105, 110, 115, 120, 125 or 130 mm. As noted herein, the absorbent body 40 may have a length and width that may be less than or equal to the length and width of the absorbent article 10.

In one embodiment, the absorbent article 10 can be a diaper having the following ranges of lengths and widths of an absorbent body 40 having an hourglass shape: the length of the absorbent body 40 can vary from about 170, 180, 190 , 200, 210, 220, 225, 240 or 250 mm to about 260, 280, 300, 310, 320, 330, 340, 350, 355, 360, 380, 385, or 390 mm; the width of the body absorbent 40 in the crotch region 16 may vary from about 40, 50, 55, or 60 mm to about 65, 70, 75, or 80 mm; the width of the absorbent body 40 in the front region of the waist 12 and / or the rear region of the waist 14 may vary from about 80, 85, 90, or 95 mm to about 100, 105, or 110 mm.

In one embodiment, the absorbent article 10 may be a training pant or a juvenile pant having the following ranges of lengths and widths of an absorbent body 40 having an hourglass shape: the length of the absorbent body 40 may vary from about 400, 410, 420, 440 or 450 mm at about 460, 480, 500, 510 or 520 mm; the width of the absorbent body 40 in the crotch region 16 can vary from about 50, 55, or 60mm to about 65, 70, 75, or 80mm; the width of the absorbent body 40 in the front region of the waist 12 and / or the rear region of the waist 14 may vary from about 80, 85, 90, or 95 mm to about 100, 105, 110, 115, 120, 125 , or 130 mm.

In one embodiment, the absorbent article 10 may be an adult incontinence garment having the following ranges of lengths and widths of an absorbent body 40 having a rectangular shape: the length of the absorbent body 40 may vary from approximately 400, 410 or 415 to about 425 or 450 mm; the width of the body absorbent 40 in the crotch region 16 can vary from about 90, or 95 mm to about 100, 105, or 110 mm. It should be noted that the absorbent body 40 of an adult incontinence garment may or may not extend to either the front region of the waist 12 or the back region of the waist 14 of the absorbent article 10.

In one embodiment, the absorbent article 10 can be a feminine hygiene product having the following ranges of lengths and widths of an absorbent body 40 having an hourglass shape: the length of the absorbent body 40 can vary from about 150. , 160, 170, or 180 mm to about 190, 200, 210, 220, 230, 240, 250, 260, 270, 280, 290, 300, 310 or 320 mm; The width of the absorbent body in the crotch region 16 can vary from about 30, 40, or 50 mm to about 60, 70, 80, 90 or 100 mm.

The absorbent body 40 may have two surfaces, 74 and 76, such as a surface facing the carrier 74 (also referred to as a body facing surface 74) and a garment facing surface 76. Edges, such as edges longitudinal sides, 42 and 44, and such as the front and rear end edges, 46 and 48, can connect the two surfaces, 74 and 76. In one embodiment, for example, in the embodiment illustrated in Figures 14A and 14B, the absorbent body 40 can have one or more holes 41 extending from the body facing surface 74 of the absorbent body 40 to the garment facing surface 76 of the absorbent body 40.

In one embodiment, the absorbent body 40 may be composed of a woven material of hydrophilic fibers, cellulosic fibers (eg, wood pulp fibers), natural fibers, synthetic fibers, woven or non-woven sheets, gauze meshes or other structures of stabilization, superabsorbent materials, binder materials, surfactants, selected hydrophobic and hydrophilic materials, pigments, lotions, odor control agents or the like, as well as combinations thereof. In one embodiment, the absorbent body 40 may be a matrix of cellulose fluff and superabsorbent material.

In one embodiment, the absorbent body 40 can be constructed of a single layer of materials, or alternatively, it can be constructed of two layers of materials or more. In an embodiment in which the absorbent body 40 has two layers, the absorbent body 40 can have a wearer-oriented layer suitably composed of hydrophilic fibers and a garment-oriented layer suitably composed at least in part of a high-absorbency material. commonly known as superabsorbent material. In such modality, the layer oriented towards carrier of the absorbent body 40 can suitably be composed of cellulose fluff, such as wood pulp fluff, and the garment-facing layer of the absorbent body 40 can suitably be composed of superabsorbent material, or a mixture of cellulose fluff and superabsorbent material. As a result, the layer facing the carrier may have a lower absorbent capacity per unit of weight than the garment-oriented layer. The layer facing the carrier can alternatively be composed of a mixture of hydrophilic fibers and superabsorbent material, as long as the concentration of superabsorbent material present in the layer facing the carrier is less than the concentration of superabsorbent material present in the layer oriented towards the carrier. garment so that the layer facing the wearer may have a lower absorbent capacity per unit weight than the garment-oriented layer. It is also contemplated that the garment-oriented layer may be composed only of superabsorbent material without departing from the scope of this disclosure. It is also contemplated that, in one embodiment, each of the layers, the one facing the wearer and the one facing the garment, may have a superabsorbent material so that the absorbent capacities of the two superabsorbent materials may be different and may provide the absorbent body 40 a minor Absorbent capacity in the layer oriented towards the wearer than in the garment-oriented layer.

In the absorbent body 40, various types of wettable hydrophilic fibers can be used. Examples of suitable fibers include natural fibers, cellulosic fibers, synthetic fibers composed of cellulose or cellulose derivatives, such as rayon fibers; inorganic fibers composed of an inherently wettable material, such as glass fibers; synthetic fibers made from inherently wettable thermoplastic polymers, such as particular polyamide or polyester fibers, or composed of wettable thermoplastic polymers, such as polyolefin fibers which are hydrophilized by suitable means. The fibers may be hydrophilized, for example, by treatment with a surfactant, treatment with silica, treatment with a material having a suitable hydrophilic fraction and not being easily removed from the fiber, or by coating the non-wettable hydrophobic fibers with a hydrophilic polymer during or after the formation of the fiber. For example, a suitable type of fiber is a wood pulp which is a highly absorbent bleached sulphate wood pulp containing mainly softwood fibers. However, wood pulp can be interchanged with other fiber materials, such as synthetic, polymer, or blown fibers. or with a combination of blown and natural fibers. In one embodiment, the cellulose fluff may include a mixture of wood pulp fluff. An example of wood pulp fluff may be "CoosAbsorb ™ S Cellulose Lint" or an available equivalent of Abitibi Bowater, Greenville, South Carolina, United States, which is a highly absorbent bleached sulphate wood pulp that primarily contains soft wood from the south.

The absorbent body 40 can be formed with a dry forming technique, an air forming technique, a wet forming technique, a foam forming technique, or the like, as well as combinations thereof. A non-woven fabric of coform can also be used. The methods and apparatus for carrying out such techniques are well known in the art.

Suitable superabsorbent materials can be selected from natural, synthetic, and modified natural materials and polymers. The superabsorbent materials can be inorganic materials, such as silica gels, or organic compounds, such as cross-linked polymers. The crosslinking can be covalent, ionic, Van der Waals, or hydrogen bonding. Typically, a superabsorbent material may be capable of absorbing at least about ten times its weight in liquid. In one embodiment, the superabsorbent material can absorb more than twenty-four times its weight in liquid. Examples of superabsorbent materials include, polyacrylamide, polyvinyl alcohol, ethylene maleic anhydride copolymers, polyvinyl ethers, hydroxypropylcellulose, carboxymal methylcellulose, polyvinyl morpholinone, polymers and copolymers of vinyl sulfonic acid, polyacrylates, polyacrylamides, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, and the like. Additional polymers suitable for superabsorbent materials include starch grafted with hydrolyzed acrylonitrile, starch grafted with acrylic acid, and isobutylene maleic anhydride copolymers and mixtures thereof. The superabsorbent material may be in the form of discrete particles. The discrete particles can be of any desired shape, for example, spiral or semi-spiral, cubic, rod-shaped, polyhedral, etc. Also contemplated for use herein are shapes that have the greatest ratio of maximum dimension / minimum dimension, such as needles, flakes and fibers. Conglomerates of particles of superabsorbent materials can also be used in the absorbent body 40.

In one embodiment, the absorbent body 40 may be free of superabsorbent material. In one embodiment, the absorbent body 40 may have at least about 15% by weight of a superabsorbent material. In one modality, the absorbent body 40 can have at least about 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 99 or 100% by weight of a superabsorbent material. In one embodiment, the absorbent body 40 may have less than about 100, 99, 95, 90, 85, 80, 75, 70, 65, 60, 55, 50, 45, 40, 35, 30, 25, or 20% by weight of a superabsorbent material. In one embodiment, the absorbent body 40 may have from about 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55 or 60% to about 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 99 or 100% by weight of a superabsorbent material. Examples of superabsorbent material include, but are not limited to, FAVOR SXM-9300 or an equivalent available from Evonik Industries, Greensboro, North Carolina, United States and HYSORB 8760 or equivalent available from BASF Corporation, Charlotte, North Carolina, United States.

The absorbent body 40 can be superposed on the inner layer 72 of the outer covering 26, which extends laterally between the elastic members of the legs, 66 and 68, and can be attached to the inner layer 72 of the outer covering 26, such as joining these with adhesive. However, it is to be understood that the absorbent body 40 may be in contact with, and not join with, the outer covering 26 and remain within the scope of this description. In one embodiment, the outer covering 26 can be composed of a single layer and the absorbent body 40 it may come into contact with the single layer of the outer coating 26. In one embodiment, a layer, such as, but not limited to, a fluid transfer layer 78, may be positioned between the absorbent body 40 and the outer shell 26. In addition or alternatively, a separating layer 81 can be positioned between the absorbent body 40 and the outer covering 26, as shown in Figures 7-14B.

Fluid transfer layer: In various embodiments, as illustrated in the non-limiting example of Figure 3, an absorbent article 10 can be constructed without a fluid transfer layer 78. In various embodiments, as illustrated in the non-limiting examples of Figures 4- 6 and 12-14B, the absorbent article 10 can have a fluid transfer layer 78. In a mode wherein the fluid transfer layer 78 is positioned on the side facing the body 74 of the absorbent body 40 and does not extend over the body. below the garment-facing side 76 of the absorbent body 40, such as in Figure 4, the surfaces of the fluid transfer layer 78 can be described as a surface facing the wearer 80 and a garment-facing surface 82. Without However, in other embodiments where the fluid transfer layer 78 is positioned above the surface oriented towards the body 74 of the absorbent body 40, extends around at least one of the longitudinal edges 42, 44 of the absorbent body 40, and / or extends below at least a portion of the garment-facing surface 76 of the absorbent body 40, as illustrated in Figure 12, the fluid transfer layer 78 can be described as having a first major surface 80 and a second major surface 82. The first major surface 80 can be oriented toward the body of the wearer in one position above the body-facing surface 74 of the absorbent body 40, but can be oriented away from the body of the wearer (towards the wearer's garments) at a position below the garment-facing surface 76 of the absorbent body 40.

In one embodiment, the fluid transfer layer 78 may be in contact with the absorbent body 40. In one embodiment, the fluid transfer layer 78 may be attached to the absorbent body 40. The attachment of the fluid transfer layer 78 to the Absorbent body 40 can be produced by any means known to an expert, such as, but not limited to, adhesives. In one embodiment, as illustrated in the non-limiting example of Figure 4, a fluid transfer layer 78 can be positioned between the material facing the body 28 and the absorbent core 40. In one embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. he Non-limiting example of Figure 5, a fluid transfer layer 78 can completely enclose, or wrap, the absorbent body 40 and can seal itself. In such an embodiment, the fluid transfer layer 78 can be folded on itself and then sealed by the use, for example, of pressure and / or heat. In one embodiment, such as, for example, in the non-limiting illustration of Figure 6, a fluid transfer layer 78 can be composed of separate sheets 78a, 78b of material that can be used to partially or fully encompass the absorbent body 40 and which can be sealed to each other by the use of a sealing means such as an ultrasonic bonding device or other thermochemical bonding means or the use of an adhesive.

In one embodiment, the fluid transfer layer 78 may be in contact and / or joined with the surface facing the carrier 74 of the absorbent body 40. In one embodiment, the fluid transfer layer 78 may be in contact and / or joining with the body facing surface 74 and at least one of the edges, 42, 44, 46 and / or 48, of the absorbent body 40. In one embodiment, the fluid transfer layer 78 may be in contact with and / or joining with the body facing surface 74, at least one of the edges, 42, 44, 46 and / or 48, and the garment-facing surface 76 of the absorbent body 40. In one embodiment, the absorbent body 40 may be partially or completely encompassed by a fluid transfer layer 78.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 12, the fluid transfer layer 78 may be comprised of a first sheet 78a (also referred to as a first fluid transfer layer 78a), a second sheet 78b (also referred to as a second transfer layer). of fluids 78b), and a third sheet 78c (also referred to as a third fluid transfer layer 78c). The first fluid transfer layer 78a may include a first major surface 80 and a second major surface 82 opposite the first major surface 80. The second fluid transfer layer 78b may also include a first major surface 80 and a second major surface 82 opposite the first main surface 80. The first fluid transfer layer 78a may at least partially wrap the absorbent body 40, as shown in Figure 12. The first fluid transfer layer 78a can be positioned on at least a first portion 74a of the body facing surface 74 of the absorbent body 40, extend around the first longitudinal side edge 42 of the absorbent body 40, and extend below at least a portion 76a of the garment-facing surface 76 of the absorbent body 40. Alternatively, the first layer of fluid transfer 78a can be configured to completely wrap the absorbent body 40, by wrapping practically the entire surface facing body 74 of the absorbent body 40, the first and second longitudinal side edges 42, 44, respectively, of the absorbent body 40, and the entire garment-facing surface 76 of the absorbent body 40, as illustrated in Figure 5.

Also shown in Figure 12 is a second fluid transfer layer 78b. The second fluid transfer layer 78b, if present, can be configured similarly to the first fluid transfer layer 78a. For example, the second fluid transfer layer 78b may at least partially envelop the absorbent body 40. The second fluid transfer layer 78b may be positioned over at least a second portion 74b of the body-facing surface 74 of the absorbent body 40. , extending around the second longitudinal side edge 44 of the absorbent body 40, and extending below at least a portion 76b of the garment facing surface 76 of the absorbent body 40.

The fluid transfer layer 78 can also include a third sheet 78c which forms a third fluid transfer layer 78c. The third layer of fluid transfer 78c may be positioned in contact with the body-facing surface 74 of the absorbent body 40, the longitudinal side edges, 42 and 44, of the absorbent body 40, and a substantial portion of the garment-facing surface 76 of the absorbent body 40. The third fluid transfer layer 78c may be comprised of a material different from that of the first fluid transfer layer 78a and / or the second fluid transfer layer 78b, as shown in Figure 12.

Figures 13, 14A, and 14B illustrate an exploded, perspective view of an embodiment of an absorbent article 10 similar to the absorbent article 10 as illustrated in Figure 12. In some embodiments, an adhesive 83 may be used to join the layer separator 81, the first fluid transfer layer 78a, and the second fluid transfer layer 78b to the outer coating 26. For example, the adhesive 83 could be configured in a slit coating manner and include six lanes 83a, 83b, 83c , 83d, 83e, and 83f of adhesive 83, as shown in Figures 13 and 14A, or five lanes of adhesive, 83a, 83a, 83b, 83c, 83d, and 83e as shown in Figure 14B. The rail 83a may join a portion 33 of the first fluid transfer layer 78a to the outer coating 26, the rail 83f may join a portion 35 of the second layer of fluid. fluid transfer 78b to outer coating 26 (in Figures 13 and 14A) or rail 83e may join a portion 35 of the second fluid transfer layer 78b to outer covering 26 (in Figure 14B), and rails 83b- 83e may join the separator layer 81 and / or the third fluid transfer layer 78c (not shown in Figure 13 for purposes of clarity) to the outer coating 26 (in Figures 13 and 14A) or the rails 83b-83d may joining the separator layer 81 and / or the third fluid transfer layer 78c to the outer coating 26. In a mode where the separator layer 81 extends beyond the first fluid transfer layer 78a and the second transfer layer towards the longitudinal side edges, 18 and 20, of the absorbent article 10, respectively, the adhesive rails 83a and 83e or 83f can join the first fluid transfer layer 78a and the second fluid transfer layer 78b to the separation layer 81, respectively. As shown in Figure 13, the adhesive 83 can extend from the leading edge of the waist 22 to the trailing edge of the waist 24.

As an alternative for joining the fluid transfer layer 78 to the outer covering 26 or the separating layer 81 in a continuous, consistent manner over the entire length of the absorbent article 10, the fluid transfer layer 78 may include a central area of the sides 89 having a reduced surface area of attachment to the outer covering 26 or to the separating layer 81 and / or a reduced amount of adhesive 83 as compared to a front area of the attached waist 85 and a rear area of the attached waist 87. For example, the adhesive 83 in Figure 13 could be applied with the adhesive rails 83a, 83b, 83c, 83d, 83e, and 83f extending from the leading edge of the waist 22 to the trailing edge of the waist 24, however, the amount of adhesive in each adhesive rail 83a, 83b, 83c, 83d, 83e, and 83f could be decreased in the central area of the sides 89. In such an embodiment, the fluid transfer layer 78 could be attached to the outer coating 26 or the separating layer 81 in the central area of the sides 89 with less adhesive 83 than in the front area of the joined waist 85 or the rear area of the joined waist 87.

Alternatively, the adhesive 83 may be configured not to extend from the leading edge of the waist 22 to the trailing edge of the waist 24, as shown in Figure 14A, so that there is no adhesive 83 present in the central area of the sides 89. In Figure 14A, the adhesive 83 extends from the leading edge of the waist 22 through the front area of the attached waist 85, and from the trailing edge of the waist 24 through a rear area of the waist joined 87. As shown in the embodiment illustrated in Figure 14A, each of the first fluid transfer layer 78a and the second fluid transfer layer 78a may include a central area of the sides 89, in which the first fluid transfer layer 78a and the second fluid transfer layer 78b does not bind to the outer coating 26. Additionally, the separator layer 81 and / or the third fluid transfer layer 78c (not shown in Figure 14A for purposes of clarity) may also not be attached to the outer covering 26 in the central area of the sides 89. The central area of the sides 89 can extend over the entire width of the first fluid transfer layer 78a extending below the garment facing surface 76 of the absorbent body 40, and / or the entire width of the second fluid transfer layer 78b extending below the garment facing surface 76 of the absorbent body 40, and / or the entire width of the body. apa separator 81 and / or the third fluid transfer layer 78c. Thus, the front area of the joined waist 85 and the rear area of the joined waist 87 each can comprise a larger surface area of engagement of the fluid transfer layer 78 to the outer covering 26 than a surface area of the layer coupling. fluid transfer 78 to outer coating 26 in the central area of the sides 89, which may provide greater void volume in the central area of the sides 89 and greater flexibility in the absorbent article 10. In the embodiment shown in Figure 14A, the central area of the sides 89 can provide a length along the absorbent article 10 in which the separating layer 81, the first fluid transfer layer 78a, and the second fluid transfer layer 78b do not join or mate with the outer coating 26.

In another embodiment as depicted in Figure 14B, the adhesive 83 may be configured such that one or more lanes of adhesive, such as the adhesive rail 83c, extend from the leading edge of the waist 22 to the trailing edge of the adhesive. waist 24 of absorbent article 10, while the other adhesive rails 83a, 83b, 83d, and 83e, do not extend from the leading edge of waist 22 to the trailing edge of waist 24 of absorbent article 10. In some embodiments, two lanes of adhesive, such as 83c and 83d, can be configured to extend from the leading edge of the waist 22 to the trailing edge of the waist 24 of the absorbent article 10, while the other lanes of adhesive, such as 83a, 83b, and 83e, do not extend from the leading edge of the waist 22 to the trailing edge of the waist 24 of the absorbent article 10. In the embodiment shown in Figure 14B, the adhesive rails 83a, 83b, 83d, and 83eeach extends from the leading edge of the waist 22 through a front area of the attached waist 85 and each extends from the rear edge of the waist 24 through a rear area of the attached waist 87, however, the adhesive rails 83a, 83b, 83d, and 83e do not extend through the central area of the sides 89. The adhesive rail 83c, however, extends through the central area of the sides 89, and thus, it can join the separating layer 81 and / or the third fluid transfer layer 78c (not shown in Figure 14B for purposes of clarity) to the outer covering 26 in the central area of the sides 89. In some embodiments including different configurations of the fluid transfer layer 78, the adhesive rail 83c can join a portion of fluid transfer layer 78 to the separator layer 81 or to the outer coating 26 in the central area of the sides 89. The adhesive rail 83c can focus between what s longitudinal side edges 18, 20 of the absorbent article 10. As discussed above with respect to Figure 14A, the front area of the joined waist 85 and the rear area of the attached waist 87 each may comprise a greater engagement surface area from the fluid transfer layer 78 to the outer coating 26 that a coupling surface area of the fluid transfer layer 78 to the outer coating 26 in the central region of the sides 89 as shown in Figure 14B, which can provide greater void volume in the central area of the sides 89 and greater flexibility in the absorbent article 10. Alternatively, the fluid transfer layer 78 can be attached to the outer cover 26 or to the separating layer 81 in the central area of the sides 89 with less adhesive 83 than in the front area of the joined waist 85 or the rear area of the attached waist 87 as shown in Figure 14B.

The fluid transfer layer 78 may be foldable, less hydrophilic than the absorbent body 40, and sufficiently porous to allow liquid body exudates to penetrate through the fluid transfer layer 78 to reach the absorbent body. 40. In one embodiment, the fluid transfer layer 78 may have sufficient structural integrity to resist wetting of the fluid and the absorbent body 40. In one embodiment, the fluid transfer layer 78 may be constructed from a single layer of material or can be a laminate that is constructed from two or more layers of material.

In one embodiment, the fluid transfer layer 78 may include, but is not limited to, natural and synthetic fibers, such as, but not limited to, polyester, polypropylene, acetate, nylon, polymeric materials, cellulosic materials, such as wood pulp, cotton, rayon, viscose, LYOCELL® like that of the Lenzing Company of Austria, or mixtures of these or other cellulosic fibers, and combinations thereof. Natural fibers may include, but are not limited to, wool, cotton, linen, hemp and wood pulp. Wood pulps may include, but are not limited to, softwood fluff of standard grade, such as "CoosAbsorb ™ Fluff Pulp" or equivalent available from Abitibi Bowater, Greenville, South Carolina, United States, which is a pulp of highly absorbent bleached sulphate wood containing softwood fibers, mainly from the south.

In various embodiments, the fluid transfer layer 78 may include cellulosic material. In various embodiments, the fluid transfer layer 78 may be folded wadding or high strength fabric. In various embodiments, the fluid transfer layer 78 may include polymeric material. In one embodiment, a fluid transfer layer 78 may include a spunbond material. In one embodiment, a fluid transfer layer 78 may include a meltblown material. In one embodiment, the fluid transfer layer 78 can be a laminate of a blown nonwoven material having thin fibers laminated to at least one layer of spunbonded nonwoven material. which has thick fibers. In such an embodiment, the fluid transfer layer 78 can be a spunbond-meltbond ("SM") bonding material. In one embodiment, the fluid transfer layer 78 can be spunbond-spunbond-spunbond ("SMS") splicing material. A non-limiting example of such a fluid transfer layer 78 can be a 10 g / m 2 spunbond-spun bond-spun bond material. In various embodiments, the fluid transfer layer 78 may be comprised of at least one material that is hydraulically entangled in a nonwoven substrate. In various embodiments, the fluid transfer layer 78 can be comprised of at least two hydraulically entangled materials in a non-woven substrate. In various embodiments, the fluid transfer layer 78 may have at least three materials that are hydraulically entangled in a non-woven substrate. A non-limiting example of a fluid transfer layer 78 may be a hydraulically entangled substrate of 33 g / m2. In such an example, the fluid transfer layer 78 can be a 33 g / m2 hydraulically entangled substrate composed of a 12 g / m2 spin bonding material, a 10 g / m2 wood pulp material having a length from about 0.6 cm to about 5.5 cm, and a short polyester fiber material of 11 g / m2. To manufacture the transfer layer of fluids 78 just described, the spunbond material of 12 g / m 2 can provide a base layer while the 10 g / m 2 wood pulp material and the short polyester fiber material of 11 g / m 2 can provide mix homogeneously with each other and deposit on the spunbond material and then entangle hydraulically with the spunbond material.

As shown in Figures 12-14B, some embodiments of the fluid transfer layer 78 can be comprised of similar materials and manufactured in a manner similar to some embodiments of the body oriented material 28, as will be described in more detail below. For example, as shown in Figure 12, the first fluid transfer layer 78a and the second fluid transfer layer 78b may include a support layer 92 and a layer of projections 94. The projection layer 94 may comprise a plurality of projections 90 formed from a plurality of fibers in the projection layer 94. Further details regarding the composition and manufacture of such embodiments of the fluid transfer layer 78 are discussed in more detail below with respect to material oriented towards the body 28.

In some embodiments in which the fluid transfer layer 78 includes the projections 90, the Fluid transfer layer 78 may provide advantages for an absorbent article 10. For example, fluid transfer layer 78 may provide the most efficient distribution of body exudates towards the absorbent body 40, which in turn may decrease the likelihood of that body exudates may compromise the sealing effect of the containment fins 52, 54. Such a fluid transfer layer 78 may also cause the outer covering 26 to continue to dry after an insult by providing more separation between the absorbent body 40 and the outer covering 26.

In various embodiments, a wet strength agent may be included in the fluid transfer layer 78. A non-limiting example of a wet strength agent may be Kymene 6500 (557LK) or equivalent available from Ashland Inc. of Ashland, Kentucky. , U.S. In various embodiments, a surfactant may be included in the fluid transfer layer 78. In various embodiments, the fluid transfer layer 78 may be hydrophilic. In various embodiments, the fluid transfer layer 78 can be hydrophobic and can be treated in any manner known in the art to render it hydrophilic.

In one embodiment, the fluid transfer layer 78 may be in contact and / or joined with an absorbent body 40 which is at least partially processed from the particles such as superabsorbent material. In an embodiment in which the fluid transfer layer 78 at least partially or completely encompasses the absorbent body 40, the fluid transfer layer 78 should not expand or stretch unduly as this could cause the particulate material to escape from the body absorbent 40. In one embodiment, the fluid transfer layer 78, while in a dry state, must have respective extension values at the maximum load in the directions of the machine and transverse 30% or less and 40%. one hundred or less, respectively.

In one embodiment, the fluid transfer layer 78 may have a length equal, greater, or less than the length along the absorbent body 40. The fluid transfer layer 78 may have a length along the length of the fluid transfer layer 78. it varies from about 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 200, 210, 220, 225, 230, 240, 250, 260, 270, 280, 290, 300, 310, 320, 330, 340, or 350 mm to about 355, 360, 380, 385, 390, 395, 400, 410, 415, 420, 425, 440, 450, 460, 480, 500, 510, or 520 mm.

Acquisition layer: In various embodiments, as illustrated, for example, in Figure 5, the absorbent article 10 may have an acquisition layer 84. The acquisition layer 84 may help decelerate and diffuse inflows or jets of liquid body exudates that penetrate the body-oriented material 28. In one embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 can be positioned between the body-facing material 28 and the absorbent body 40 to collect and distribute the body exudates for absorption by the body absorbent 40. In one embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 may be positioned between the body facing material 28 and a fluid transfer layer 78 if a fluid transfer layer 78 is present. In one embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 it can be positioned between a secondary liner 34, if present, and the absorbent body 40.

The acquisition layer 84 may have a surface facing the carrier 86 and a garment facing surface 88. In one embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 may be in contact with and / or joined with the material facing the body 28. In In an embodiment in which the acquisition layer 84 joins the material facing the body 28, the attachment of the acquisition layer 84 to the material facing the body 28 can occur through the use of an adhesive and / or the bonding by melting point. The fusion point bond can be selected from, but not limited to, ultrasonic bonding, pressure bonding, thermal bonding, and combinations thereof. In one embodiment, fusion point binding can be provided in any pattern as deemed appropriate.

The acquisition layer 84 may have any length dimension along as deemed appropriate. The acquisition layer 84 may have a length along about 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 200, 210, 220, 225, 230, 240, or 250 mm at about 260, 270 , 280, 290, 300, 310, 320, 340, 350, 360, 380, 400, 410, 415, 420, 425, 440, 450, 460, 480, 500, 510 or 520 mm. In one embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 can be of any length so that the acquisition layer 84 abuts the edges of the waist, 22 and 24, of the absorbent article 10.

In one embodiment, the length along the acquisition layer 84 can be the same as the length along the absorbent body 40. In such an embodiment, the midpoint of the length along the acquisition layer 84 can Align substantially with the midpoint of the length along the absorbent body 40.

In one embodiment, the length along the acquisition layer 84 may be shorter than the length along the absorbent body 40. In such an embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 may be placed at any desired location for the entire length along the absorbent body 40. As an example of such embodiment, the absorbent article 10 must contain a destination zone, where the repeated affluences of liquid typically occur in the absorbent article 10. The particular location of a destination zone may vary depending on the age and gender of the absorbent article carrier 10. For example, men tend to urinate more toward the frontal region of the absorbent article 10 and the target area can be staggered forward within the absorbent article 10. For example, the destination area for a male carrier can be positioned approximately 2 ¾ "forward of the longitudinal midpoint of the absorbent body 40 and can have a length of about ± 3"and a width of about ± 2". The female destination area can be located closer to the center of the crotch region 16 of the absorbent article 10. For example, the destination area for a female carrier can positioned 1"forward of the longitudinal mid-point of the absorbent body 40 and may have an approximate length of between + 3"and a width of approximately ± 2". As a result, the relative longitudinal positioning of the acquisition layer 84 within the absorbent article 10 can be selected to better correspond to the destination area of either or both categories of carriers.

In one embodiment, the absorbent article 10 may contain a target zone centered within the crotch region 16 of the absorbent article 10 with the premise of the absorbent article 10 being used by a female carrier. The acquisition layer 84, therefore, can be positioned along the length along the absorbent article 10 so that the acquisition layer 84 can substantially align with the target area of the absorbent article 10 intended for a female carrier. . Alternatively, the absorbent article 10 may contain a target area positioned between the crotch region 16 and the forward region of the waist 12 of the absorbent article 10 with the premise that the absorbent article 10 is worn by a male carrier. The acquisition layer 84, therefore, can be positioned along the length along the absorbent article 10 so that the acquisition layer 84 can be substantially aligned with the target area of the absorbent article 10 intended for a male carrier. .

In one embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 may have a size dimension that is the same size dimension of the destination zone of the absorbent article 10 or a size dimension larger than the size dimension of the destination area of the absorbent article. 10. In one embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 may be in contact with and / or joined with the material facing the body 28 at least partially in the target area of the absorbent article.

In various embodiments, the acquisition layer 84 can have a shorter length along, the same or longer than the length along the absorbent body 40. In a mode in which the absorbent article 10 is a diaper, the acquisition layer 84 may have a length along about 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, or 180 mm to about 200, 210, 220, 225, 240, 260, 280, 300, 310 or 320 mm . In such an embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 may be shorter in length along the length along the absorbent body 40 and may be staggered from the forward end edge 46 of the absorbent body 40 by a distance of approximately 15, 20, or 25 mm to approximately 30, 35 or 40 mm. In a modality in which the absorbent article 10 can be a training pant or a juvenile pant, the acquisition layer 84 can have a length along approximately 120, 130, 140, 150, 200, 210, 220, 230 , 240 or 250 mm to approximately 260, 270, 280, 290, 300, 340, 360, 400, 410, 420, 440, 450, 460, 480, 500, 510 or 520 mm. In such an embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 can have a length that is shorter than the length along the absorbent body 40 and can range from about 25, 30, 35 or 40 mm to about 45, 50, 55 60, 65, 70, 75, 80 or 85 mm from the front end edge 46 of the absorbent body 40. In a mode in which the absorbent article 10 is a garment for the incontinence in adults, the acquisition layer 84 may have a length along about 200, 210, 220, 230, 240, or 250 mm at about 260, 270, 280, 290, 300, 320, 340, 360, 380 , 400, 410, 415, 425, or 450 mm. In such an embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 can have a length that is shorter than the length along the absorbent body 40 and the acquisition layer 84 can be staggered by a distance of approximately 20, 25, 30 or 35 mm to approximately 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70 or 75 mm from the front end edge 46 of the absorbent body 40.

The acquisition layer 84, if desired, can have any width. The acquisition layer 84 may have a width dimension of about 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, or 70 mm to about 80, 90, 100, 110, 115, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, or 180 mm. The width of the acquisition layer 84 may vary depending on the size and shape of the absorbent article 10 within which the acquisition layer 84 will be placed. The acquisition layer 84 may have a width less, the same, or greater than the width of the acquisition layer 84. width of the absorbent body 40. Within the crotch region 16 of the absorbent article 10, the acquisition layer 84 may have a width less, the same, or greater than the width of the absorbent body 40.

In one embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 may include natural fibers, synthetic fibers, material superabsorbent, woven material, non-woven material, wet laid fibrous webs, a fibrous web stretched to the substantially unbonded air, a fibrous web stretched to the stabilized, operably linked air, or the like, as well as combinations thereof. In one embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 may be formed of a material that is substantially hydrophobic, such as a nonwoven web composed of polypropylene, polyethylene, polyester, and the like, and combinations thereof.

In various embodiments, the acquisition layer 84 can have fibers that can have a denier of more than about 5. In various embodiments, the acquisition layer 84 can have fibers that can have a denier of less than about 5.

In one embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 may be a heat-adhered, air-entrained carded weft, such as a 50 g / m 2 heat-treated carded air-through-weave composite having a homogeneous blend of about 50% bicomponent wrap fibers / polyethylene / polypropylene core having a denier 3 fiber diameter and approximately 50% polyethylene / polypropylene shell / core bicomponent fiber having a diameter of 1.5 denier fiber. An example of such a compound is a compound having approximately 50% ES-FiberVisions ES-2 denier 3 bicomponent fibers. about 50% ES-FiberVisions ES-2 215 denier fibers, or an equivalent compound, available from FiberVisions ES Corp., Duluth, Georgia, United States.

In one embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 may be a through-air heat-adhered carded weft such as a 50 g / m 2 heat-treated carded web composite having a homogenous blend of about 50% rayon fibers having a diameter of denier 3 fiber and approximately 50% of polyethylene / polypropylene wrap / core bicomponent fibers having a denier fiber diameter of 1.5. An example of such a compound is a composite having approximately 50% Rayheim Galaxy Rayon fibers of denier 3 and about 50% of denier 1.5 ESC-215 fibers of ES FiberVisions, or an equivalent compound, available from ES FiberVisions Corp ., Duluth, Georgia, United States.

In one embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 may be a through-air heat-adhered carded weft such as a 50 g / m 2 heat-adhered woven carded weft composite having a homogeneous mixture of about 40% hollow polypropylene fibers having a diameter of denier 7 fiber and approximately 60% of polyethylene / polypropylene wrap / core bicomponent fibers having a fiber diameter of denier 17. An example of such a compound is a composite having approximately 40% of hollow fibers T-118 of denier polypropylene 7 of ES FiberVisions and about 60% of bicomponent fibers Varde of denier 17 of ES FiberVisions, or an equivalent compound , available from ES FiberVisions Corp., Duluth, Georgia, United States.

In one embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 may be a through-air-adhered heat-treated carded web such as a 35 g / m 2 heat-treated carded air-through-weave composite having a homogenous blend of about 35% wrap / core bicomponent fibers polyethylene / polypropylene having a diameter of 6 denier fiber, about 35% polyethylene / polypropylene wrap / core bicomponent fibers having a denier 2 fiber diameter, and about 30% polyester fibers having a diameter of denier fiber 6. An example of such a compound is a compound having about 35% Huvis 180-N (PE / PP 6d), about 35% Huvis N-215 (PE / PP 2d), and about 30 % of Huvis SD-10 PET 6d, or an equivalent compound, available from Sambo Company, Ltd, Korea.

In one embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 can be a fibrous web stretched to thermally bonded stabilized air (e.g. Concert product code DT200 .100.D0001) which is available from Glatfelter, a company with offices in York, Pennsylvania, United States.

In one embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 may include a coform / foam material. In one embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 may include a resilient coform material. As used herein, the term "coform" refers to a blend of blown fibers and absorbent fibers such as cellulosic fibers that can be formed by air formation of a blown polymer material, while simultaneously fibers suspended in air are blown into the jet of blown fibers. The coform material may also include other materials, such as superabsorbent material. The blown fibers and the absorbent fibers (and other optional materials) can be collected on a shaping surface, such as that provided by a porous web. The forming surface may include a gas permeable material that is placed on the forming surface. The coform materials are further described in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,508,102 and 5,350,624 to Georger et al. And 4,100,324 to Anderson and U.S. Publication No. 2012/0053547 by Schroeder et al., Which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety and to the extent that they do not conflict with this. As used herein, the term "of resilient coform" is refers to a non-woven layer of resilient coform that includes a matrix of blown fibers and an absorbent material, wherein the fibers blow-molded constitute from about 30% by weight to about 99% by weight of the weft and the absorbent material it constitutes from about 1% by weight to about 70% by weight of the screen, and wherein, in addition, the blown fibers are formed from a thermoplastic composition containing at least one propylene / α-olefin copolymer having a propylene content of about 60 mole% to about 99.5 mole% and an α-olefin content of about 0.5 mole% to about 40 mole%, wherein the copolymer further has a density of about 0.86 to about 0.90 grams per cubic centimeter and the composition has a melt flow rate of about 120 to about 6000 grams per 10 m Inute, determined at 230 ° C in accordance with Test Method ASTM D1238-E, although practical considerations may reduce the range of the high flow rate in the final molten state.

The acquisition layer 84 may have additional parameters, including basis weight and thickness. In one embodiment, the basis weight of the acquisition layer 84 can be at least about 10 or 20 g / m2. In one modality, the total basis weight of the acquisition layer 84 may be from about 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 or 60 g / m2 to about 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 100, 110, 120, or 130 g / m2. In one embodiment, the basis weight of the acquisition layer 84 may be less than about 130, 120, 110, 100, 90, 85, 80, 75, 70, 65, 60 or 50 g / m2. In one embodiment, the acquisition layer 84 may have a thickness, measured at 0.05 psi (.345 kPa), of less than about 1.5 mm. In one embodiment, such as, for example, when the absorbent article 10 can be a diaper, the acquisition layer 84 can have a thickness, measured at 0.05 psi (.345 kPa), of less than about 1.5, 1.25, or 1.0 mm. In one embodiment, such as, for example, when the absorbent article can be a feminine hygiene product, the acquisition layer 84 can have a thickness, measured at 0.2 psi (1.379 kPa), of less than about 1.5, 1.25, or 1.0 mm.

Separating layer: In various embodiments, such as illustrated, for example, in Figures 7-16, the absorbent article 10 may include a separator layer 81. The separator layer 81 may act as a ventilation layer to isolate the outer covering 26 and to reduce the moisture sensation of the absorbent article 10 on the side facing outwards of the outer covering 26. The separating layer 81 can be positioned between the absorbent body 40 and the outer covering 26. In some embodiments, the separating layer 81 can be positioned to be in contact with substantially all of the garment-facing surface 76 of the absorbent body 40, such as in Figure 9 and Figures 12-16B. In some embodiments, the separator layer 81 can be positioned at least partially between a material facing the body 28 and the outer covering 26, as illustrated in Figures 7, 8, 10, and 11.

The separator layer 81 may be of the same approximate width as the absorbent body 40, as shown in Figures 7-16, however, the separator layer 81 may be smaller in width than the absorbent body 40 or wider than the absorbent body. absorbent body 40. As an example, the separator layer 81 can extend from a longitudinal side edge 18 to the other longitudinal side edge 20 of the absorbent article 10. In some embodiments, the separator layer 81 can extend from the front edge of the waist 22 to the back edge of the waist 24 of the absorbent article 10. In some embodiments, the separator layer 81 may abut the outer covering 26.

The separator layer 81 may be comprised of a variety of materials. In one embodiment, the separator layer 81 can be a nonwoven material. In some modalities, the layer Separator 81 can be a spunbond / meltblown / spunbond ("SMS") bonding material. In some embodiments where the separator layer 81 is an SMS material, the spin-bond polymer may be polypropylene, such as ExxonMobil ™ PP3155 available from ExxonMobil Chemical Company, Houston, Texas, United States, and the blown polymer may be polypropylene also, such as Polypropylene 3962 available from Total Pethrochemicals USA, Inc., Houston, Texas, United States, or Achieve ™ 6936G2 available from ExxonMobil Chemical Company, Houston, Texas, United States. In some embodiments, the separating layer 81 may be of a basis weight of 8-12 g / m2.

Material oriented towards the body: As illustrated in Figures 17-19, a body facing material 28 can be a fluid entangled laminated web with the projections 90 extending outwardly and away from at least one intended external surface of the laminated web. In one embodiment, the projections 90 may be hollow. The body facing material 28 may have two layers such as a support layer 92 and a layer of projections 94. The support layer 92 may have a first surface 96 and a second opposing surface 98, as well as a thickness 100. The layer of projections 94 may have an inner surface 102 and an opposing outer surface 104, as well as also a thickness 106. An interface 108 may be present between the support layer 92 and the projection layer 94. In one embodiment, the fibers of the projection layer 94 may cross the interface 108 and become entangled and coupled with the support layer. 92 in order to form the body-oriented material 28. In an embodiment in which the support layer 92 is a non-woven fibrous web, the fibers of the support layer 92 can cross the interface 108 and become entangled with the fibers in the web. the layer of projections 94. As indicated above, in some embodiments, the fluid transfer layer 78 may be comprised of similar materials and manufactured in a manner similar to the body-oriented material 28. Thus, the description related to the material oriented towards the body 28 herein can also be applied to some embodiments of the fluid transfer layer 78.

The body-oriented material 28 can be configured in various ways in an absorbent article 10. For example, in some embodiments the body-oriented material 28 can be arranged in a generally planar manner and can abut the outer covering 26 and extend from a longitudinal side edge 18 of absorbent article 10 to the other longitudinal side edge 20 of absorbent article 10, and extend from the front edge of waist 22 to the edge back of the waist 24 of the absorbent article 10, as depicted in Figures 2, 3, and 5. In some embodiments, the body facing material 28 may be arranged in a generally planar manner and may be configured so that the oriented material to the body 28 does not extend to the longitudinal side edges, 18 and 20, of the absorbent article 10, as shown in Figures 4, 6, and 12 -14B. The body facing material 28 may have a first major surface 77 and a second major surface 79. In such embodiments as depicted in Figures 2-6 and 12-14B, the first major surface 77 may be oriented toward the carrier body. and the second main surface 79 can be oriented towards the garments of the wearer, facing the first major surface 77.

In other embodiments, the body facing material 28 may at least partially envelop the absorbent body 40, as depicted in Figures 7-11 and 15-16B. In Figures 7-9, the body facing material 28 can be positioned over the entire surface facing the body 74 of the absorbent body 40 and can extend around the longitudinal side edges, 42 and 44, of the absorbent body 40. As shown in FIG. shown in Figures 7-9, the material facing the body 28 may also extend below a first portion 76a of the garment-facing surface 76 of the absorbent body 40 and below a second portion 76b of the garment-facing surface 76 of the absorbent body 40. In the embodiments where the body-oriented material 28 at least partially envelops the absorbent body 40. so that it extends around more than a single surface 74, 76 or the longitudinal side edge 42, 44 of the absorbent body 40, the first major surface 77 of the material facing the body 28 can be described as the surface of the material oriented toward the body. body 28 which can be oriented towards the body of the wearer in a position of material facing body 28 which is above the surface facing body 74 of absorbent body 40, but can be oriented out of the body of the wearer (towards the garments of the carrier) in a position of the material facing the body 28 which is below the oriented surface towards the ia the garment 76 of the absorbent body 40.

At least a portion of the material facing the body 28 can be bent over itself. For example, Figure 9 illustrates that the body facing material can be folded over itself as the material facing body 28 wraps around one, or both, longitudinal side edges, 42 and 44, of the absorbent body 40. On the first longitudinal side edge 42 of the absorbent body 40, a first portion 79a of the second main surface 79 of the material facing the body 28 contacts a second portion 79b of the second main surface 79 of the material facing the body 28. Similarly, on the second longitudinal side edge 44 of the absorbent body 40, a third portion 79c of the second major surface 79 of the material facing the body 28 contacts a fourth portion 79d of the second major surface 79 of the material facing the body 28. In some embodiments, the first portion 79a can joining the second portion 79b and the third portion 79c can be joined to the fourth portion 79d by the use of adhesives and / or melting point bonding. It is contemplated that the length of the portions 79a and 79b and 79c and 79d of the second major surface 79 that contact each other may vary, and the contact length between the first and second portions, 79a and 79b, of the material oriented toward the body 28 may be equal to the contact length of the third and fourth portions, 79c and 79d, of the material facing the body 28, however, such contact lengths may vary at each of the longitudinal side edges, and 44, of the absorbent body 40. A configuration that includes the material facing the body 28 that bends over itself provides additional containment properties for the body. material oriented towards the body 28, especially in situations of low viscosity body exudates.

As shown in Figures 7-11, at least a portion of the material facing the body 28 may be in contact with the liquid impervious outer coating 26. For example, in Figure 8, portions 29 and 31 of the material body facing 28 may be in contact with the liquid impervious outer coating 26 where the body facing material 28 extends beyond the separator layer 81 toward the longitudinal side edges, 18 and 20. As illustrated in FIGS. Figures 7-11, the separator layer 81 can be arranged to be positioned between the garment facing surface 76 of the absorbent body 40 and the outer covering 26. In one embodiment, the separator layer 81 can be positioned between the material facing the body 28 and the outer covering 26, as illustrated in Figures 7, 8, 10, and 11. Alternatively, the separating layer 81 can be positioned between the absorbent body 40 and the material. to the body facing 28 which is positioned below the garment-facing surface 76 of the absorbent body 40, as illustrated in Figure 9. In any positioning of the separator layer 81 of these illustrative embodiments, at least a portion 29 , 31 of the material facing the body 28 can contact the outer coating impermeable to liquids 26.

The body facing material 28 can also be attached to the outer coating 26 and / or to the spacer layer 81 by the use of an adhesive and / or melt bonding. The fusion point bond can be selected from, but not limited to, ultrasonic bonding, pressure bonding, thermal bonding, and combinations thereof. Illustrative attachment configurations of the body facing material 28 to the outer coating 26 through the use of adhesives are shown in Figures 15, 16A, and 16B, in which the line of slot covering adhesive 83a and 83e or 83f join the body facing material 28 to the outer coating 26. Figure 15 illustrates that the adhesive 83, specifically, the adhesive lines 83a and 83f, extend from the leading edge of the waist 22 to the trailing edge of the waist 24 for adhering the body facing material 28 to the outer coating 26. The adhesive lines 83b, 83c, 83d, and 83e can attach the separator layer 81 to the outer coating 26. As indicated above, the body facing material 28 can additionally adhering and / or joining by melting point to the separating layer 81. In a mode wherein the separating layer 81 extends laterally beyond the material facing the body 28 towards the longitudinal edges, 18 and 20, of the absorbent article 10, the adhesive lines 83a and 83e or 83f can be used to join the body facing material 28 to the separator layer 81.

As an alternative for joining the body-oriented material 28 to the outer covering 26 or the separating layer 81 in a continuous, consistent manner over the entire length of the absorbent article 10, the material facing the body 28 may include a central area of the sides 69 having a reduced surface area of attachment to the outer covering 26 or the separating layer 81 and / or a reduced amount of adhesive 83 compared to a front area of the attached waist 65 and a rear area of the attached waist 67. example, the adhesive 83 in Figure 15 could be applied with the adhesive rails 83a, 83b, 83c, 83d, 83e, and 83f extending from the leading edge of the waist 22 to the trailing edge of the waist 24, however , the amount of adhesive in each adhesive rail 83a, 83b, 83c, 83d, 83e, and 83f could be decreased in the central area of the sides 69. In such an embodiment, the material facing the body 28 could be joined to the outer covering 26 or separating layer 81 in the central area of the sides 69 with less adhesive 83 than in the front area of the joined waist 65 or the rear area of the joined waist 67.

Alternatively, the adhesive 83 can be configured not to extend from the leading edge of the waist 22 to the rear edge of the waist 24, as shown in Figure 16A, so there is no adhesive 83 present in the central area of the sides 69. Figure 16A illustrates an alternative configuration for attaching the body facing material 28 to the outer covering 26. In Figure 16A, the adhesive 83 can extending from the leading edge of the waist 22 through a front area of the attached waist 65 and from the rear edge of the waist 24 through a rear area of the attached waist 67. However, the material oriented towards the body 28 may include a central area of the sides 69 in which the material facing the body 28 does not join the outer covering 26. Specifically, the portions 29 and 31 of the body facing material 28 that extend beyond the layer Separator 81 does not join the outer covering 26, because the adhesive lines 83a and 83f of the adhesive 83 do not extend in the central area of the sides 69. In the embodiments where the separating layer 81 is extending laterally beyond the portions 28a and 28b of the material facing the body 28 towards the longitudinal edges, 18 and 20, of the absorbent article 10, the adhesive lines 83a and 83f similarly may not extend in the central area of the sides 69 so that the portions 28a and 28b do not join the separator layer 81 in the central area of the sides 69. The central area of the sides 69 may extend across the width of the material facing the body 28 which extends below the garment-facing surface 76 of the absorbent body 40 and / or the separator layer 81 as shown in Figure 16A. The front area of the joined waist 65 and the rear area of the joined waist 67 each may comprise a greater surface area for coupling the body facing material 28 to the outer skin 26 than a surface area for coupling the material facing the body 28 to the outer covering 26 in the central area of the sides 69, which can provide greater void volume in the central area of the sides 69 as well as greater flexibility of the absorbent article 10.

In another embodiment as depicted in Figure 16B, the adhesive 83 may be configured so that one or more lanes of adhesive, such as the adhesive rail 83c, extends from the leading edge of the waist 22 to the trailing edge of the adhesive. waist 24 of absorbent article 10, while the other adhesive rails 83a, 83b, 83d, and 83e, do not extend from the leading edge of waist 22 to the trailing edge of waist 24 of absorbent article 10. In some embodiments, two lanes of adhesive, such as 83c and 83d, may be configured to extend from the leading edge of the waist 22 to the rear edge of the waist 24 of the absorbent article 10, while the other adhesive rails, such as 83a, 83b, and 83e, do not extend from the leading edge of the waist 22 to the trailing edge of the waist 24 of the absorbent article 10. In the embodiment shown in Figure 16B, the adhesive rails 83a, 83b, 83d, and 83e each extend from the leading edge of the waist 22 through a front area of the attached waist 65 and each extends from the trailing edge of the waist 24 through of a rear area of the attached waist 67, however, the adhesive rails 83a, 83b, 83d, and 83e do not extend through the central area of the sides 69. The adhesive rail 83c, however, extends through the central area of the sides 69, and thus, joins the separating layer 81 to the outer covering 26 in the central area of the sides 69. In some embodiments including different configurations of the body oriented material 28, the rail 83c adhesive can join a portion n of the body facing material 28 to the separator layer 81 or to the outer coating 26 in the central area of the sides 69. The adhesive rail 83c may be centered between the longitudinal side edges 18, 20 of the absorbent article 10. As discussed above with respect to Figure 16A, the front area of the attached waist 65 and the rear area of the attached waist 67 each may comprise a greater surface area to engage the body facing material 28 to outer coating 26 which a surface area for coupling material facing body 28 to outer coating 26 in the central area of sides 69 as shown in Figure 16B, which may provide greater void volume in the central area of the sides 69 and greater flexibility in the absorbent article 10. Additionally, the body facing material 28 can be attached to the outer covering 26 or the separating layer 81 in the central area of the sides 69 with less adhesive 83 than in the front area of the joined waist 65 or the rear area of the joined waist 67 in the embodiment shown in Figure 16B.

In another embodiment shown in Figures 10 and 11, the body facing material 28 may include a first portion 28a that is separated from a second portion 28b. The first portion 28a and the second portion 28b may be separate sheets of material. Similar to the above description with respect to the embodiments shown in Figures 7-9, the first portion 28a and the second portion 28b of the material facing the body 28 may include a first major surface 77 and a second major surface 79. The first portion 28a of the body facing material 28 can at least partially wrap the absorbent body 40, which is configured so that the first portion 28a is positioned over at least one first portion 74a of the body facing surface 74 of the absorbent body 40, extends around the first longitudinal side edge 42 of the absorbent body 40, and extends below at least a portion 76a of the garment facing surface 76 of the body absorbent 40. The second portion 28b of the material facing the body 28 can also at least partially wrap the absorbent body 40, which is configured so that the second portion 28b is positioned on at least a second portion 74b of the surface facing the body 74 of the absorbent body 40, extends around the second longitudinal side edge 44 of the absorbent body 40, and extends below at least a portion 76b of the garment-facing surface 76 of the absorbent body 40. The first portion 28a and the second portion 28b of the material facing the body 28 can be joined to the outer covering 26 and / or to the separating layer 81 of m It is similar to the body oriented material 28 shown in Figures 15, 16A, and 16B.

In one embodiment, the body facing material 28 may have a length that is equal, greater, or less than the length along the absorbent body 40. The material facing the body 28 may have a length along the length of the body. varies from about 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 200, 210, 220, 225, 230, 240, 250, 260, 270, 280, 290, 300, 310, 320, 330, 340, or 350 mm to about 355, 360, 380, 385, 390, 395, 400, 410, 415, 420, 425, 440, 450, 460, 480, 500 , 510, or 520 mm.

The configurations of the body facing material 28 extending around more surface area of the absorbent body 40 in addition to only the body facing surface 74 of the absorbent body 40 provides advantages in the absorption and containment of body exudates in the absorbent article 10. For example, the body-oriented material 28 which extends around a first longitudinal side edge 42 of the absorbent body 40, and / or extends around a second longitudinal side edge 44 of the absorbent body 40, and / or which extends below the garment-facing surface 76 of the absorbent body 40 can provide the most efficient distribution of body exudates towards the absorbent body 40. Such configurations can allow the body exudates to contact and penetrate the absorbent body 40 from multiple directions, in contrast to only the surface facing the body 74 of the c absorbent body 40. As a result, the most efficient distribution of body exudates in the absorbent body 40 may provide that a smaller absorbent body 40 is used in the absorbent article 10, which potentially saves costs and gives one more item flexible 10.

Additionally, the most efficient distribution of body exudates into the absorbent body 40 can also provide better containment properties by reducing residual body exudates in the body, such as fecal material, in the body-oriented material 28, which reduces the likelihood of that body exudates can spread and compromise the sealing effect of the containment fins 52, 54. Such reduction of body exudates, such as fecal material, can also provide better skin condition of the wearer by reducing skin irritation. In addition, such a body-facing material 28 can also cause the outer covering 26 to continue a dry feel after an insult by providing more separation between the absorbent body 40 and the outer covering 26.

Projections of Material oriented towards the body / Fluid transfer layer In one embodiment, the projections 90 can be filled with fibers from the projection layer 94 and / or the support layer 92. In one embodiment, the projections 90 can be hollow. The projections 90 may have closed ends 110 that may not have openings. In some embodiments, however, it may be desired to increase the pressure and / or dwell time of the fluid jets that impinge on the process of entanglement as described herein to create one or more openings (not shown) in each of the projections 90. The openings may also be formed in the material facing the body by forming poles (not shown) that can located on the projection forming surface 156 (such as the forming surface 156 in Figures 22 and 22A). These openings can be formed in the closed ends 110 and / or the side walls 112 of the projections 90. The openings should be distinguished from the interstitial fiber spacing, which is the separation of a single fiber to the next individual fiber.

In various embodiments, the projections 90 can have a percentage of open area in which light can pass unhindered through the projections 90 by the shaping material of the projections 90, such as, for example, fibrous material. The percentage of open area present in the projections 90 covers the entire area of the projection 90 where the light can pass through the projection 90 without obstacles. Thus, for example, the percentage of open area of a projection 90 can encompass the entire open area of the projection 90 by means of openings, interstitial spacing between fibers, and any other spacing within the projection 90 where the light can pass through. without obstacles In one modality, the projections 90 can be formed without openings and the open area may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers. In various embodiments, the projections 90 may have less than about 1, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1% open area in a selected area of the material facing the body 28 as shown in FIG. Measured according to the test method Method to determine the percent open area that is described herein.

In some embodiments where the body oriented material 28 and / or the fluid transfer layer 78 include projections 90 and extend below at least a portion of the garment facing surface 76 of the absorbent body 40, the projections 90 they can provide the advantage of the smoother feeling of the outer covering 26 of the absorbent article 10.

In one embodiment, such as the non-limiting mode illustrated in Figure 20, the projections 90 may be round when viewed from above with somewhat domed or curved domes or ends 110, as distinguished when viewed from the top. in a cross section as shown in Figures 20A and 20B. The actual shape of the projections 90 can be varied depending on the shape of the forming surface in which the fibers of the projection layer 94 are pushed. Thus, although without limiting the variations, the shapes of the projections 90 can be, for example, round, oval, square, rectangular, triangular, rhombic, etc. Both the width and the height of the projections 90 can be varied, as can the separation and pattern of the projections 90. In one embodiment, different shapes, sizes and spacing of the projections 90 can be used in the same projection layer 94. In one embodiment, the projections 90 may have a height, measured in accordance with the method of testing Method for determining the percent open area described herein, of more than about 1 mm. In one embodiment, the projections 90 may have a height greater than about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 mm. In one embodiment, the projections 90 may have a height of about 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 mm to about 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 mm.

The projections 90 of the body facing material 28 can be located and emitted from the outer surface 104 of the projection layer 94. In one embodiment, the projections 90 can extend from the outer surface 104 of the projection layer 94 in a direction of moving away from the support layer 92. In a mode in which the projections 90 can be hollow, they can have open ends 114 which can be located towards the internal surface 102 of the projection layer 94 and can be covered by the second surface 98 of the support layer 92 or the inner surface 102 of the projection layer 94 depending on the amount of fiber that is used from the projection layer 94 to form the projections 90. The projections 90 can be surrounded by contact areas 116 that can be formed from the outer surface 104 of the projection layer 94, although the thickness of the contact areas 116 may be comprised of both the projection layer 94 and the support layer 92. The contact areas 116 may be relatively flat and flat, as it is shown in Figures 7 and 8, or topographic variability can be incorporated in the contact areas 116. For example, in one embodiment, a contact area 116 may have a plurality of three-dimensional shapes formed therein by forming the layer of projections 94 in a three-dimensional shaped shaping surface such as described in U.S. Patent No. 4,741,941 to Engelbert et al. Granted to Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, and incorporated herein by reference in its entirety for all purposes. For example, in one embodiment, a contact area 116 may be provided with depressions 118 that may extend in part or in its entirety in the projection layer 94 and / or the support layer 92. In addition, a contact area 116 may undergo engraving that can impart surface texture and other functional attributes to the contact area 116. In a embodiment, a contact area 116 and the body-oriented material 28 as a whole can be provided with openings 120 that can extend through the material facing body 28 to further facilitate the movement of fluids (such as liquids and solids that they form body exudates) in and through the body-oriented material 28. Such openings 120 must be distinguished from the interstitial fiber spacing, which is the separation of an individual fiber to the next individual fiber.

In various embodiments, the contact areas 116 may have a percentage of open area in which light can pass through the contact areas 116 unhindered by the material forming the contact areas 116, such as, for example, fibrous material. The percentage of open area present in contact areas 116 encompasses all areas of contact areas 116 where light can pass through contact areas 116 without hindrance. Thus, for example, the open area percentage of a contact area 116 may encompass the entire open area of the contact areas 116 by means of openings, the interstitial spacing between fibers, and any other spacing within the contact areas 116. where light can go through without obstacles. In various embodiments, the contact areas 116 may have more than about 1% open area in a selected area of the body-oriented material 28, as measured according to the test method Method for determining the percent open area described herein. In one embodiment, the contact areas 116 may be formed without openings and the open area may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers. In various embodiments, the contact areas 116 may have more than about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 or 20% open area in a selected area of the body oriented material 28. In various embodiments, the contact areas 116 may have approximately 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 5.5 , 6, 6.5, 7, 7.5, 8, 8.5, 9, 9.5, 10, 10.5, 11, 11.5, 12, 12.5, 13, 13.5, 14, 14.5, 15, 15.5, 16, 16.5, 17, 17.5, 18 , 18.5, 19, 19.5, or 20% open area in a selected area of the body oriented material 28. In various embodiments, the contact areas 116 may have from about 1, 2 or 3% to about 4 or 5% of open area in a selected area of material facing the body. In various embodiments, the contact areas 116 may have from about 5, 6 or 7% to about 8, 9 or 10% open area in a selected area of the material facing the body 28. In various embodiments, the contact areas 116 can have about 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 or 15% to about 16, 17, 18, 19 or 20% area open in a selected area of the body facing material 28. In various embodiments, the contact areas 116 may have more than about 20% open area in a selected area of the body facing material 28.

The projections 90 of the body facing material 28 can be provided in any orientation as deemed appropriate. In one embodiment, the projections 90 of the body facing material 28 can be randomly provided to the body facing material 28. In one embodiment, the projections 90 can be linearly oriented in the longitudinal direction 30 of the absorbent article 10. In one embodiment , the projections 90 can be linearly oriented in the lateral direction 32 of the absorbent article 10. In one embodiment, the projections 90 can be linearly oriented in a direction that can be at an angle with the longitudinal direction 30 and / or the lateral direction 32 of the article Absorbent 10. The contact areas 116 of the body facing material 28 may be provided in any orientation as deemed appropriate. In one embodiment, the contact areas 116 can be oriented linearly in the longitudinal direction 30 of the absorbent article 10. In one embodiment, the contact areas 116 can be linearly oriented in the lateral direction 32 of the absorbent article 10. In one embodiment, the contact areas 116 may be linearly oriented in a direction that may be at an angle to the longitudinal direction 30 and / or the lateral direction 32 of the absorbent article 10.

In one embodiment, the projections 90 and / or the contact areas 116 may be provided such that the projections 90 are located in the crotch region 16 of the absorbent article 10, are located toward the perimeter of the absorbent article 10, and combinations of they. In one embodiment, the projections 90 may have different heights in different areas of the absorbent article 10. In such an embodiment, for example, the projections 90 may have a first height in one area of the absorbent article 10 and a different height in a different area of the same. absorbent article 10. In one embodiment, the projections 90 may have variable diameters in different areas of the absorbent article 10. In such an embodiment, for example, the projections 90 may have a first diameter in an area of the absorbent article 10 and may have a diameter different in another area of the absorbent article 10. In one embodiment, the concentration of the projections 90 may vary in the absorbent article 10. In such an embodiment, a region of the absorbent article 10 may have a greater concentration of the projections 90 than the concentration of the absorbent article. the projections 90 in a second area of the article absorbent 10.

In one embodiment, the projections 90 and / or the contact areas 116 may be provided in an orientation according to a pattern. Non-limiting examples of patterns according to a pattern may include, but are not limited to, lines, circles, squares, rectangles, triangles, ovals, stars, and hexagons. In one embodiment, an orientation according to a pattern can be provided so that the orientation according to a pattern is parallel to the longitudinal direction 30 and / or the lateral direction 32 of the absorbent article 10. In one embodiment, an orientation according to a pattern can be provided from so that the orientation according to a pattern is at an angle with the longitudinal direction 30 and / or the lateral direction 32 of the absorbent article 10. In one embodiment, a projection 90 of the material facing the body 28 can be at least partially aligned, completely aligned , or not aligning at all with another projection 90 of the material facing the body 28, such as, for example, an adjacent projection 90. Without being bound by theory, it is believed that the alignment (either partial, complete alignment or non-alignment at all) of a projection 90 of the material facing the body 28 with another projection 90, such as a projection adjacent 90, the material facing the body 28 can result in channels of the contact areas 116 that can prevent the spread of body exudates along the body-facing material 28 of the absorbent article 10 and / or direct the propagation of body exudates toward desired locations of the material facing the body 28 of the absorbent article 10.

As illustrative examples, Figures 21A, 21B and 21C provide illustrations of an illustrative embodiment of the partial alignment, complete alignment and non-alignment at all of two projections on adjacent lines of projection. In the embodiment illustrated, for example, in Figure 21A, a first line 91 of the projections 90 can be arranged linearly in a direction that is parallel to the longitudinal direction 30 of the absorbent article 10. In such embodiment, a projection 90 of a first line 91 of the projections 90 that are oriented in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction 30 of the absorbent article can be at least partially aligned with a projection 90 of a second immediately adjacent line 93 of the projections 90 that are oriented in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction 30 of the absorbent article. In such embodiment, a partial alignment of a projection 90 of a first line 91 of the projections 90 that are oriented in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction 30 of the absorbent article 10 with a projection 90 of a second Immediately adjacent line 93 of the projections 90 which are oriented in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction 30 of the absorbent article 10 can result in the passage of an imaginary line 95 in the lateral direction 32 of the absorbent article 10 through each of the projections 90 of the first 91 and second 93 lines of projections 90. It should be understood that the passage of the imaginary line 95 through each of the projections 90 of the first 91 and second 93 lines of projections 90 does not necessarily translate into a step through the midpoint of each of the projections 90 of the first 91 and second 93 lines of projections 90. In the embodiment illustrated, for example, in Figure 21B, a first line 91 of the projections 90 can be arranged linearly in a direction that is parallel to the longitudinal direction 30 of the absorbent article 10. In such embodiment, a projection 90 of a first line 91 of the projections 90 which is oriented in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction 30 of the absorbent article 10 can be completely aligned with a projection 90 of a second immediately adjacent line 93 of the projections 90 which is oriented in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction 30 of the article. absorbent 10. In such embodiment, a complete alignment of a projection 90 of a first line 91 of the projections 90 that is oriented in a direction parallel to the direction longitudinal 30 of the absorbent article 10 with a projection 90 of a second immediately adjacent line 93 of the projections 90 which is oriented in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction 30 of the absorbent article 10 may result in the passage of an imaginary line 95 in the direction side 32 of the absorbent article 10 through each of the projections 90 of the first 91 and second 93 lines of projections 90. In such an embodiment, the imaginary line 95 could pass through the midpoint of each of the projections 90 of the first 91 and second 93 lines of projections 90. In the embodiment illustrated, for example, in Figure 21C, a first line 91 of the projections 90 can be arranged linearly in a direction that is parallel to the longitudinal direction 30 of the absorbent article 10. In such a mode, a projection 90 of a first line 91 of the projections 90 is oriented in a direction parallel to the direction Longitudinal 30 of the absorbent article 10 may not align at all with a projection 90 of a second immediately adjacent line 93 of the projections 90 which is oriented in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction 30 of the absorbent article 10. In such mode, a of complete alignment of a projection 90 of a first line 91 of the projections 90 which is oriented in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction 30 of the absorbent article 10 with a projection 90 of a second immediately adjacent line 93 of the projections 90 which is oriented in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction 30 of the absorbent article 10 may result in the passage of an imaginary line 95 in the lateral direction 32 of the absorbent article 10 through of only one of the projections 90 or through none of the projections 90 of the first 91 and second 93 lines of the projections 90. It should be understood that additional configurations of partial alignment, full alignment and non-alignment may be formed at all.

While it is possible to vary the density and fiber content of the projections 90, in one embodiment, the projections 90 can be "hollow". With reference to Figures 20A and 20B, it can be seen that when the projections 90 are hollow, they can have a sheet 122 formed from the fibers of the projection layer 94. The sheet 122 can define an interior space 124 that can have a lower density of fibers compared to the sheet 122 of the projections 90. By "density" is meant the amount or content of fibers per unit volume selected within a portion of the interior space 124 or the sheet 122 of the projection 90. distance 103 between the surface facing outwardly of the sheet 122 to the surface facing inwardly of the sheet 122, as well as also the density of the sheet 122 may vary within a given or individual projection 90 and may also vary between different projections 90. In addition, the size of the hollow interior space 124, as well as its density may vary within a given projection 90 or individual and may also vary between different projections 90. The photomicrographs of Figures 20A and 20B reveal a lower density or amount of fibers in the interior space 124 compared to the sheet 122 of the projection 90 illustrated. As a result, if there is at least a portion of an interior space 124 of a projection 90 having a fiber density less than at least a portion of the sheet 122 of the same projection 90, then the projection is considered as "hollow". In this sense, in some situations, there may not be a well-defined demarcation between the sheet 122 and the inner space 124, but if with a sufficient increase of a cross section of one of the projections, it may be observed that at least a part of the inner space 124 of the projection 90 has a density less than a certain portion of the sheet 122 of the same projection 90, then the projection 90 is considered as "hollow". Furthermore, if at least a portion of the projections 90 of a material facing the body 28 are hollow, the layer of projections 94 and the material facing the body 28 are considered as "hollow" or like they have "hollow projections". In one embodiment, the portion of the projections 90 that are hollow can be greater than or equal to about 50 percent of the projections 90 in a selected area of the material facing the body 28. In a mode, more than or equal to approximately 70 100 of the projections 90 in a selected area of the body facing material 28 may be hollow. In one embodiment, more than or equal to about 90 percent of the projections 90 in a selected area of the body facing material 28 may be hollow.

As will become more apparent in connection with the description of the processes set forth below, the body-oriented material 28 may be the result of the movement of the fibers in the projection layer 94 in one and sometimes two or more directions. With reference to Figure 19, whether the shaping surface (such as the shaping surface 156 in Figures 22 and 22A) on which the layer of projections 94 is placed is continuous with the exception of the shaping holes (such as the shaping holes). forming holes 170 in Figure 22A) which are used to form the projections 90, then the force of the fluid entanglement jets striking and bouncing off the continuous surface contact areas (e.g. in Figure 22A) corresponding to the contact areas 116 of the projection layer 94 can cause a migration of fibers adjacent to the inner surface 102 of the projection layer 94 in the support layer 92 adjacent its second surface 98. This migration of the fibers in the first direction can be represented by the arrows 126 shown in FIG. Figure 19. In order to form the projections 90 extending outwardly from the outer surface 104 of the projection layer 94, there must be a migration of the fibers in a second direction which is shown by the arrows 128. It is this migration in the second direction, which causes the fibers of the projection layer 94 to move outward and away from the outer surface 104 to form the projections 90.

In an embodiment in which the support layer 92 can be a non-woven fis web, depending on the integrity of the web and the force and residence time of the fluid jets, there can also be a movement of the fibers of the support layer 92 in the projection layer 94 as shown by the arrows 130 in Figure 19. The net result of these fiber movements can be the creation of a body-oriented material 28 with good overall integrity and the lamination of the layers (92 and 94) at its interface 108 thus allowing the subsequent processing and handling of the material oriented towards the body 28. As a result of the processes of entanglement by As described herein, it is generally not desired that the fluid pressure that is used to form the projections 90 be of sufficient force to push the fibers of the support layer 92 to expose them to the exterior surface 104 of the projection layer 94. .

Support layer and Projection layer of Material oriented towards the body / Fluid transfer layer As the name implies, the support layer 92 can support the layer of projections 94 containing the projections 90 and can be made from a number of structures as long as the support layer 92 is capable of supporting the layer of projections 94. The primary functions of the support layer 92 can be to protect the layer of projections 94 during the formation of the projections 90, be able to join or entangle with the layer of projections 94 and assist in the subsequent processing of the layer of projections 94 and oriented material towards the resulting body 28. Suitable materials for the support layer 92 may include, but are not limited to, nonwoven webs or fabrics, gauze materials, mesh materials, pulp / cellulose / wood based products that can be considered a subset of wefts or webs. non-woven fabrics as well as foam materials, films and combinations of the above which provide that the selected materials are capable of supporting a process of manufacture such as a fluid entanglement process. In one embodiment, the support layer 92 may be a nonwoven fis web made from a plurality of randomly deposited fibers which may be short fibers such as are used, for example, in carded webs, air laid webs, etc. or which are more continuous fibers, such as are found, for example, in the fused or spun-bonded webs. For the functions that the support layer 92 must perform, the support layer 92 may have a greater degree of integrity than the layer of projections 94. In this regard, the support layer 92 may remain substantially intact when subjected to the process of entangled by fluid that is discussed in more detail below. The degree of integrity of the support layer 92 can be such that the material forming the support layer 92 can resist going down and filling the projections 90 of the projection layer 94. As a result, in a mode in which the Support layer 92 is a fis non-woven web, it should have a higher degree of bond between fibers and / or fiber tangles than the fibers in spreads layer 94. While it may be desirable to have fibers of the backing layer 92 entangled with the fibers of the projection layer 94 adjacent the interface 108 between the two layers, it is generally desired that the fibers of this support layer 92 not be integrated or entangled in the layer projections 94 to such a degree that large portions of these fibers are able to reach within the projections 90.

In one embodiment, a function of the support layer 92 may be to facilitate the further processing of the projection layer 94. In one embodiment, the fibers that are used to form the projection layer 94 may be more expensive than those used As a result, in such an embodiment, it may be desired to keep the base weight of the projection layer 94 low. In doing so, however, it may become difficult to process the projection layer 94 subsequent to its formation. . With the attachment of the projection layer 94 to an underlying support layer 92, its further processing, winding and unwinding, storage and other activities can be done more effectively.

In order to resist the greater degree of movement of the fibers, as mentioned above, in one embodiment, the support layer 92 may have a higher degree of integrity than the layer of projections 94. This greater degree of integrity may occur in a number of ways. One can be the union between fibers that can be achieved through the thermal or ultrasonic bonding of the fibers to each other with or without the use of pressure as in the connection through air, point bonding, bonding with powders, chemical bonding, adhesive bonding, engraving, bonding by calendering, etc.

In addition, other materials may be added to the fibrous mixture such as adhesives and / or bicomponent fibers. Pre-entangling of a fibrous non-woven backing layer 92 such as, for example, by subjecting the web to hydroentanglement, punching, etc., can also be used before this backing layer 92 is bonded to a layer of projections 94. The combinations of the above are also possible. Even other materials, such as foams, gauzes and meshes, may have sufficient initial integrity so that additional processing is not necessary. The level of integrity can in many cases be visually observed due to, for example, observation with the eye without the aid of techniques such as point bonding which is commonly used with fibrous nonwoven webs such as spunbond webs and webs that They contain short fibers. Further magnification of the support layer 92 may also reveal the use of fluid entanglement or the use of thermal and / or adhesive bonding to bond the fibers together. Depending on whether samples of the individual layers (92 and 94) are available, the tensile test on either or both of the machine direction and cross machine direction can be adopted to compare the integrity of the support layer 92 with that of the projection layer 94. See for example the ASTM D5035-11 test which is incorporated herein in its entirety for all purposes.

The type, the basis weight, the tensile strength and other properties of the support layer 92 can be chosen and varied depending on the particular end use of the resulting material facing the body 28. When the body facing material 28 is used as part of an absorbent article such as an absorbent personal care article, wipe, etc., it may generally be desired that the support layer 92 be a fluid permeable layer, good wet and dry strength, be able to absorb fluids such as body exudates, possibly retain fluids for a certain period of time and then release the fluids to one or more underlying layers. In this regard, non-fibrous fabrics such as spunbonded webs, blown webs and carded webs such as webs, thermally bonded carded webs and coform materials are very suitable as backing layers 92. The foam materials and gauze materials are also very suitable. In addition, the backing layer 92 may be a multilayer material due to the use of multiple layers or the use of multi-bank forming processes as are commonly used in the manufacture of spinning and meltblown webs, as well as also combinations of layers of meltblown and spunbonded webs. In the formation of such support layers 92, natural materials can be used and Synthetic alone or in combination to manufacture the materials. In various embodiments, the support layer 92 can have a basis weight of from about 5 to about 40 or 50 g / m2.

The type, the basis weight and the porosity of the support layer 92 can affect the process conditions necessary to form the projections 90 in the projection layer 94. Materials of higher basis weight can increase the entanglement force of the jet streams. tangled fluid necessary to form the projections 90 in the projection layer 94. However, the support layers 92 of higher basis weight can also provide improved support for the projection layer 94 since it is determined that the projection layer 94 by itself it is too stretchable to maintain the shape of the projections 90 after the forming process. The layer of projections 94 itself can unduly lengthen in the machine direction due to the mechanical forces exerted on it by subsequent winding and conversion processes and consequently decrease and distort the projections. Furthermore, without the support layer 92, the projections 90 in the projection layer 94 tend to collapse due to the winding pressures and the compressive weights that the projection layer 94 undergoes in the coiling and subsequent conversion process and are not recovered to the extent that they do when a support layer 94 is present.

The support layer 92 can be subjected to additional treatment and / or additives to alter or improve its properties. For example, surfactants and other chemicals can be added both internally and externally to the components that form all or a portion of the support layer 92 to alter or improve their properties. Compounds commonly referred to as hydrogels or superabsorbents that often absorb their weight in liquids can be added to the support layer 92 in both particulate and fiber form.

The layer of projections 94 can be made from a plurality of randomly deposited fibers which can be short fibers such as those used, for example, in carded webs, air-laid webs, coform webs, etc., or they can be more continuous fibers such as are found in, for example, spunbond or blow-melt webs. The fibers in the projection layer 94 may have less inter-fiber bonding and / or entanglement of the fiber and therefore less integrity, compared to the integrity of the support layer 92, especially in embodiments in which the backing layer 92 It is a fibrous nonwoven web. In one embodiment, the fibers in the projection layer 94 may have no initial fiber bond for the purpose of allowing the formation of the projections 90, as will be explained in more detail below in relation to the description of one or more of the process modes and apparatus for forming the body-oriented material 28. Alternatively, when both the support layer 92 and the the layer of projections 94 may be both fibrous nonwoven webs, the layer of projections 94 may have less integrity than the support layer 92 because the layer of projections 94 has, for example, less fiber bonding, less adhesive or less pre-tangle of the fibers that form the projection layer 94.

The layer of projections 94 may have a sufficient amount of movement capacity of the fiber to allow the fluid entanglement process described below to be capable of moving a first plurality of the plurality of fibers of the projection layer 94 out of the plane XY of the projection layer 94 and in the perpendicular direction or Z of the projection layer 94 so as to be capable of forming the projections 90 (illustrated in Figure 17). As noted herein, in various embodiments, projections 90 may be hollow. As described herein, in one embodiment, a second plurality of the plurality of fibers in the layer of projections 94 may become entangled with the support layer 92. If more continuous fiber structures are used as webs of webs.

Spunbond or blown fused, in one embodiment, there may be little or no prior bonding of the projection layer 94 prior to the fluid entanglement process. Longer fibers, as they are generated in the meltblown and spunbond processes (which are often referred to as continuous fibers to differentiate them from short fibers) typically require more force to move the fibers in the Z direction than that which they will require short fibers of shorter length, which typically have fiber lengths of less than about 100 mm and more typically fiber lengths in the range of 10 to 60 mm. In contrast, short fiber webs, such as carded webs and air laid webs may have some degree of pre-bonding or tangling of the fibers due to their shorter length. Such shorter fibers require less fluid force from the fluid entanglement jets to move them in the Z direction to form the projections 90. As a result, a balance must be found between the length of the fiber, the degree of pre-bonding of the fiber , the force of the fluid, the frame speed and the dwell time in order to be able to create the projections 90 without, unless desired, openings in the contact areas 116 or projections 90 or push too much material into the interior space 124 of the projections 90 what does projections 90 too rigid for some end-use applications.

In various embodiments, the layer of projections 94 may have a basis weight ranging from about 10 g / m2 to about 60 g / m2. The spunbonded webs typically can have base weights of between about 15 and about 50 g / m2 when used as the spill layer 94. The diameters of the fibers can vary between about 5 and about 20 microns. The fibers may be single-component fibers formed from a single polymeric composition or they may be bicomponent or multicomponent fibers wherein a portion of the fiber may have a lower melting point than the other components in order to allow bonding between the fibers. fibers through the use of heat and / or pressure. Hollow fibers can also be used. The fibers may be formed from any polymer formulation that is typically used to form spin-bonding webs. Examples of such polymers include, but are not limited to, polypropylene ("PP"), polyester ("PET"), polyamide ("PA"), polyethylene ("PE"), and polylactic acid ("PLA"). The spunbond webs may be subjected to post-forming bonding and entanglement techniques if necessary to improve the processability of the web before subjecting it to the projection forming process.

The meltblown webs typically may have base weights of between about 20 and about 50 g / m2 when used as the layer of projections 94. The diameters of the fiber may vary between about 5 and about 0.5 microns. The fibers may be single-component fibers formed from a single polymeric composition or they may be bicomponent or multicomponent fibers wherein a portion of the fiber may have a lower melting point than the other components in order to allow bonding between the fibers. fibers through the use of heat and / or pressure. The fibers may be formed from any polymer formulation that is typically used to form spin-bonding webs. Examples of such polymers include, but are not limited to, PP, PET, PA, PE and PLA.

Carded and air-laid webs may use short fibers that typically can range in length from about 10 to about 100 millimeters. The denier of the fibers can vary between approximately 0.5 and approximately denier 6 depending on the particular final use. Base weights may vary between about 20 and about 60 g / m2. The short fibers can be made from a wide variety of polymers including, but not limited to, PP, PET, PA, PE, PLA, cotton, rayon, linen, wool, hemp and regenerated cellulose such as, for example, Viscose. The fiber blends can also be used, such as blends of two-component fibers and single-component fibers, as well as mixtures of solid fibers and hollow fibers. If attachment is desired, it can be performed in a number of ways including, for example, through-air bonding, calendering bonding, spot bonding, chemical bonding and bonding with adhesives such as bonding with powders. If necessary, to further improve the integrity and processability of a layer of projections 94 prior to the projection forming process, the layer of projections 94 may be subjected to pre-entanglement processes to increase the entanglement of the fibers within the layer of projections 94 before the formation of the projections 90. The hydroentanglement can be advantageous in this regard.

Although the above nonwoven weave types and the forming processes described herein are suitable for use in conjunction with the projection layer 94, it is envisioned that other wefts and forming processes may also be used as long as the wefts are capable of forming the projections 90 Each of the support layer 92 and the projection layer 94 can be made in a variety of basis weights depending on the particular final application. For example, the body-oriented material 28 may have a total basis weight of about 15, 20 or 25 to about 100, 110 or 120 g / m2 and the backing layer 92 can have a basis weight of about 5 to about 40 or 50 g / m2, while the projections layer 94 may have a basis weight of about 15 or 20 to about 50 or 60 g / m2. Such base weight ranges may be possible due to the manner in which the material facing the body 28 can be formed and the use of two different layers with different functions in relation to the forming process. As a result, the body-oriented material 28 can be made in commercial environments that were not considered possible until now due to the inability to process the individual frames and form the desired projections 90.

In one embodiment, the body facing material 28 of an absorbent article 10 can have a load of more than about 2 Newton per 25 mm width to 10% extension in the machine direction. In one embodiment, the body facing material 28 of an absorbent article 10 can have a load of more than about 4 Newton per 25 mm width to 10% extension in the machine direction. In one embodiment, the body facing material 28 of an absorbent article 10 can have a load of more than about 6 Newton per 25 mm wide to 10 extension in the direction of the machine. In various embodiments, the body-oriented material 28 of an absorbent article 10 can have a resilience of more than about 70%. In various embodiments, the body-oriented material 28 of an absorbent article 10 can have a resilience of more than about 70, 73, 75, 77, 80, or 83%.

In various embodiments, the absorbent article 10 can be a diaper. In various embodiments, the amount of residual fecal material simulant in the body-oriented material 28 of an absorbent article 10 after an assault with fecal material simulant as measured according to the test method of simulant determination of Residual fecal material described herein may be less than about 2.5, 2.4, 2.3, 2.2, 2.1, 2.0, 1.9, 1.8, 1.7, 1.6, or 1.5 grams. In various embodiments, the fecal material simulant propagation area in the body facing material 28 of an absorbent article 10 after an assault with faecal material simulant as measured according to the area determination test method. Fecal material simulant propagation described herein may be less than about 34, 33, 32, 31, 30, or 29 cm2.

In various embodiments, the absorbent article 10 can be a product for feminine hygiene. In several modalities, the time of second admission through a Body-oriented material 28 in an absorbent article 10 after an assault with a menstrual simulant can be less than about 30, 20 or 15 seconds as measured by the use of the Admission / Rewet test method described in I presented. In various embodiments, the second admission time of the menstruation simulant through a body-oriented material 28 in an absorbent article 10 may be from about 25 or 30% to about 50, 60 or 70% less than the commercially available products. after an assault with menstrual simulant as measured by the use of the Admission / Rewet test method described herein. In various embodiments, the second admission time through a body-oriented material 28 in an absorbent article 10 may be approximately 25, 30, 31, 47, 49, 50, 54, 60, 64, 66 or 70% less than the commercially available products after an assault with a menstrual simulant as measured by the use of the Admission / Rewet test method described herein.

In several embodiments, the second admission time through a body-oriented material 28 in an absorbent article 10 after an assault with a menstrual simulant may be less than about 30, 20 or 15 seconds without an increase in the amount of rewet as measured by the use of the Admission / Rewet test method described herein. In various embodiments, the second admission time of the menstruation simulant through a body-oriented material 28 in an absorbent article 10 can be from about 25 or 30% to about 50, 60 or 70% less than the commercially available products. without an increase in the amount of rewet after an assault with the menstrual simulant as measured by the use of the Admission / Rewet test method described herein. In various embodiments, the second admission time through the body-oriented material 28 in an absorbent article 10 after an assault with a menstruation simulator may be approximately 25, 30, 31, 47, 49, 50, 54, 60, 64, 66 or 70% less than the commercially available products without an increase in the amount of rewet.

Process to manufacture the Material oriented towards the body / Fluid transfer layer A fluid entanglement process can be employed to form the body-oriented material 28. As indicated above, the same or a similar manufacturing process can be employed to form some embodiments of the process. fluid transfer layer 78. Any number of fluids may be used to join the support layer 92 and the projection layer 94 together which includes both liquids and gases. The most common technology used in this regard can be referred to as hydroentangled or hydroentangled technology that can use pressurized water as the entanglement fluid.

Referring to Figure 22 there is shown one embodiment of a process and apparatus for forming a material oriented to the body entangled by fluid 28 with the projections 90. The apparatus 150 can include a first conveyor 152, a roller for driving the tape conveyor 154, a projection forming surface 156, a fluid entangling device 158, an optional turbocharger 160, and a fluid removal system 162 such as a vacuum or any other conventional suction device. Such vacuum devices and other means are well known to those skilled in the art. The conveyor belt 152 can carry the layer of projections 94 within the apparatus 150. The conveyor belt 152 can be porous, in case any prior entanglement must be made in the layer of projections 94 upstream of the process illustrated in Figure 22. The conveyor belt 152 can travel in a first direction (which is the address of the machine) as shown by the arrow 164 at a first speed or speed VI. The conveyor belt 152 can be driven by a drive roller of the conveyor belt 154 or other suitable means that are well known to those skilled in the art.

The projection forming surface 156, as shown in Figure 22 may be in the form of a texturizing drum and a partially exploded view of the surface is shown in Figure 22A. The projecting surface 156 can be moved in the machine direction as shown by the arrow 166 at a speed or speed V3. This can be actuated and its speed controlled by any suitable driving means (not shown) such as electric motors and gears that are well known to those skilled in the art. The projection shaping surface 156 shown in Figures 22 and 22A may have a shaping surface 168 that contains a pattern of shaping holes 170 which may correspond to the shape and pattern of the desired projections 90 in the projection layer 94. and the forming holes 170 can be separated by a contact area 172. The forming holes 170 can be of any shape and any pattern. As can be seen in the figures representing the body facing material 28, the shapes of the forming holes 170 may be round, but should it is understood that any number of shapes and combinations of shapes may be used depending on the end-use application. Examples of possible shapes of the forming holes 170 include, but are not limited to, ovals, crosses, squares, rectangles, rhombuses, hexagons and other polygons. Such shapes can be formed on the shaping surface of projections 156 by casting, drilling, punching, laser cutting and water jet cutting. The separation of the forming holes 170 and, therefore, the degree of contact area 172 can also be varied depending on the particular end application of the material facing the body 28. In addition, the pattern of the forming holes 170 in The projection shaping surface 156 may be varied depending on the particular end application of the material facing the body 28 and / or the fluid transfer layer 78.

The material forming the projection forming surface 156 may be any number of suitable materials commonly used to form such surfaces, including, but not limited to, sheet metal, plastics and other polymeric materials, rubber, etc. The forming holes 170 can be formed into a sheet of the material that is then formed on a surface forming projections 156 or the surface of Projection conformation 156 can be molded or fused from suitable materials or printed with 3D printing technology. The projecting surface 156 can be removably fitted on and on a porous inner sheet of the optional drum 174 so that the different forming surfaces 168 can be used for different designs of the final products. The porous inner sheet of the drum 174 can interact with the fluid removal system 162 which can facilitate pulling the entanglement fluid and fibers down into the forming holes 170 in the outer shaping surface 168 thus forming the projections 90 in the projection layer 94. The inner porous sheet of the drum 174 can also act as a barrier to further delay the movement of the fibers downward in the fluid removal system 162 and other parts of the equipment thereby reducing the dirtiness of the equipment. The inner porous sheet of the drum 174 can rotate in the same direction and at the same speed as the projection forming surface 156. Furthermore, to further control the height of the projections 90, the distance between the inner sheet of the drum 174 and the projection forming surface 156. In a mode in which a porous inner sheet of the drum is used, the distance between the surface facing outwardly of the inner porous sheet drum 174 and the inwardly facing surface of the projecting surface 156 may vary from about 0 to about 5 mm.

The dimensions of the cross section of the shaping holes 170 and their depth can influence the cross section and the height of the projections 90 produced in the projection layer 94. In one embodiment, the depth of the shaping holes 170 in the The projection forming surface 156 may correspond to the height of the projections 90. In one embodiment, the depth of the shaping holes 170 in the projecting surface 156 may be from about 1 or 3 mm to about 5 or 10 mm . In one embodiment, the cross-sectional size of a shaping hole 170 may be from about 2 or 3 mm to about 6 or 10 mm, as measured along the major axis. In one embodiment, a spacing of the shaping holes 170 from center to center may be from about 3 or 4 mm to about 7 or 10 mm. The pattern of the separation between the forming holes 170 can be varied and selected depending on the determined final use. Some examples of patterns include, but are not limited to, aligned patterns of rows and / or columns, asymmetric patterns, hexagonal patterns, wavy patterns and patterns that represent images, figures and objects. It should be noted that each of the depth, spacing, size, shape and other parameters of the forming holes 170 can be varied independently of one another and can be varied based on the determined end use of the material facing the body 28 and / or the layer of fluid transfer 78 to be formed.

The contact areas 172 on the shaping surface 168 of the projection shaping surface 156 may be continuous so as not to pass the entanglement fluid 176 emanating from the fluid entanglement devices 158, but in some cases may be desired. making the contact areas 172 permeable to fluids to further texturize the exposed surface of the projection layer 94. Alternatively, the selected areas of the shaping surface 168 of the projection forming surface 156 may be fluid permeable and other waterproof areas. For example, a central zone (not shown) of the projection shaping surface 156 may be fluid permeable while the side regions (not shown) on either side of the central zone may be impervious to fluids. In addition, the contact areas 172 on the forming surface 168 may have raised areas (not shown) formed or joined thereto to form optional depressions 118 and / or optional openings 120 in the projection layer 94 and the material facing the body 28 and / or the fluid transfer layer 78.

In the embodiment of the apparatus 150 shown in Figure 22, the projection forming surface 156 is shown in the form of a texturizing drum. It should be appreciated, however, that other means can be used to create the projection surface 156. For example, a porous band or wire (not shown) can be used that includes forming holes 170 formed in the band or wire at appropriate locations. Alternatively, flexible rubberized strips that are impervious to fluid entanglement jets can be used, except for the forming holes 170. Such belts and cables are well known to those skilled in the art as are the means for controlling and controlling them. the speed of such tapes and cables. In one embodiment, a texturizing drum may be more advantageous for the formation of a body oriented material 28 and / or the fluid transfer layer 78 as described herein, since it may be done with contact areas 172. which can be smooth and impervious to the entanglement fluid 176 and which do not leave a wire weave pattern on the outer surface 104 of the projection layer 94 as the wire tapes tend to do.

An alternative to the shaping surface of projections 156 with a shaping hole depth defining the height of the projections may be a drum sheet that is thinner than the height of the projections desired, but which may be separated from the surface of the porous inner drum 174 in which it is wraps up. The separation can be achieved by any means which, preferably, does not otherwise interfere with the process of forming the projections 90 and which removes the entanglement fluid from the equipment. For example, one of the means may be a hard wire or filament that may be inserted between the projection forming surface 156 and the porous internal drum 174 as a spacer or wrap around the inner porous drum 174 below the projection forming surface. 156 to provide the proper separation. A depth of the drum cover of less than about 2 mm can make it more difficult to remove the projection layer 94 and the body facing material 28 from the projection forming surface 156 because the material of the projection layer 94 it can expand or move through the fluid flow in the projecting region below the projection forming surface 156 which in turn can distort the material facing the body 28 and / or the resulting fluid transfer layer 78.

It has been found, however, that by using a support layer 92 together with the projection layer 94 as part of the forming process, the distortion of the two fluid entangled layers resulting from the material facing the body 28 and / or the fluid transfer layer 78 can be greatly reduced and generally facilitates the removal by the cleaner of the material facing the body 28 and / or the fluid transfer layer 78 because the support layer 92 is more dimensionally stable and less extensible , the load can be assumed while the body facing material 28 and / or the fluid transfer layer 78 is removed from the projection forming surface 156. The highest tension that can be applied to the support layer 92, in Comparison with a single layer of projections 94 means that as the material facing the body 28 and / or the fluid transfer layer 78 moves away from the surface With the formation of projections 156, the projections 90 can exit the forming holes 170 smoothly in a direction approximately perpendicular to the forming surface of the projection 168 and coaxially with the forming holes 170 in the projecting surface 156. In addition, the processing speeds can be increased by using the support layer 92.

To form the projections 90 in the projection layer 94 and to laminate the support layer 92 and the projection layer 94 together, one or more fluid entanglement devices 158 can be separated above the projection forming surface 156. The most common technology that is used in this sense can be referred to as hydroligating or hydroentangled technology that can use water under pressure as an entanglement fluid. While an unbound or relatively unattached web or webs forming layers (92 and 94) may be provided on a projection forming surface 156, a multitude of high pressure fluid streams (not shown) from one or more devices of fluid entanglement 158 can move the fibers of the wefts and the turbulence of the fluid can cause the fibers to become entangled. These fluid streams can cause the fibers to become entangled further within the individual frames. The currents can also cause movement of the fibers and entanglement in the interface of two or more frames, which causes the frames to join together. Still further, if the fibers in a layer, such as the layer of projections 94, are held together loosely, they can be driven out of their XY plane and therefore in the Z direction to form the projections 90. Depending on the level of necessary entanglement, one or a plurality of such fluid entanglement devices 158 may be used.

In Figure 22, a single fluid entanglement device 158 is shown, but in the following figures where various devices are used in various regions of apparatus 150, they are labeled with letter indicators such as 158a, 158b, 158c, 158d, and 158e. When several fluid entanglement devices 158 are used, the pressure of the entanglement fluid in each subsequent entanglement device 158 may be higher than the previous one, so that the energy imparted to the frame or frames increases and thus the entanglement of fiber within or between the frames increases. This reduces the interruption of the overall uniformity of the surface density of the weft by the jets of fluid under pressure, while the desired level of entanglement is reached and therefore the bonding of the layers and the formation of the projections 90. The fluid of entanglement 176 of the fluid entanglement devices 158 may emanate from injectors through jet strips (not shown) consisting of a row or rows of pressurized fluid jets with small openings of a diameter typically of about 0.08 to approximately 0.15 mm and the separation of approximately 0.5 mm in the direction transverse to the machine. The pressure in the jets can be between about 5 bar and 400 bar, but can be typically less than about 200 bar except for the entangled materials by higher weight fluid and when it requires fibrillation. Other jet sizes, separations, number of jets and jet pressures can be used depending on the particular final application. Such fluid entanglement devices 158 are well known to those skilled in the art and are readily available from such manufacturers as Fleissner of Germany and Andritz-Perfojet of France.

The fluid entanglement device 158 can be provided with conventional hydroentanglement jet strips. Typically, these jet strips may be positioned or separated from about 5 millimeters to about 10 or 20 millimeters from the projection forming surface 156 although the actual spacing may vary depending on the base weights of the materials being actuated thereon, the pressure of the fluid, the number of individual jets that are used, the amount of vacuum that is used through the fluid removal system 162 and the speed at which the equipment is run.

In the embodiments shown in Figures 22 through 27, fluid entanglement devices 158 can be conventional hydroentanglement devices, construction and operation of which are well known to those skilled in the art. See, for example, U.S. Patent No. 3,485,706 to Evans, the content of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety for all purposes See also the description of the hydraulic entanglement equipment described by Honcycomb Systems, Inc., Biddeford, Maine, in the article entitled "Rotary Hydraulic Entanglement of Nonwovens", reissued from the INSIGHT Conference '86 INTERNATIONAL ADVANCED FORMING / BONDING, the content which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety for all purposes.

With reference to Figure 22, the layer of projections 94 can be fed into the apparatus 150 at a speed VI, the support layer 92 can be fed into the apparatus 150 at a speed V2 and the material facing the body 28 can exit the apparatus. 150 at a velocity V3, which is the velocity of the projection forming surface 156. As will be explained in more detail below, these velocities VI, V2 and V3 may be equal to each other or be varied to change the forming process and properties of the material oriented towards the resulting body 28. The feeding of both the layer of projections 94 and of the support layer 92 in the apparatus 150 at the same speed (VI and V2) can produce a material oriented towards the body 28 with the projections 90 desired. The feeding of both the projection layer 94 and the support layer 92 in the apparatus 150 at the same speed that can be faster than the machine direction velocity (V3) of the projection forming surface 156 also can forming the desired projections 90.

Also shown in Figure 22 is an optional boost roller 160 that can be driven at a speed Vf. The charge roller 160 can be run at the same speed as the velocity VI of the projection layer 94 or it can be run at a faster speed to tension the layer of projections 94 upstream of the charge roller 160 when it is desired to overfeed. Overfeeding may occur when one or both of the incoming layers (92 and 94) are fed onto the shaping surface of projections 156 at a speed greater than the speed V3 of the shaping surface of projections 156. It has been found that the improvement in the formation of the projections in the projection layer 94 may be affected by feeding the projection layer 94 onto the projection forming surface 156 at a rate greater than the incoming velocity V2 of the support layer 92. In addition, has discovered that the improvement of the properties and the projection formation can be achieved by varying the feeding speeds of the layers (92 and 94) and by also using the charge roller 160 just upstream of the forming surface projections 156 for supplying a greater amount of fiber through the projection layer 94 for subsequent movement p or the entanglement fluid 176 downwards in the forming holes 170 in the projection forming surface 156. In particular, by supercharging the projection layer 94 on the projection forming surface 156, better projection formation can be achieved than includes the increase in height of the projections.

In order to provide an excess of fiber so that the height of the projections 90 can be maximized, the layer of projections 94 can be fed onto the surface of forming projections 156 at a velocity of the greater surface (VI) than the one traveling the projection forming surface 156 (V3). With reference to Figure 22, the projection layer 94 can be fed onto the projection forming surface 156 at a velocity VI, while the support layer 92 can be fed at a velocity V2 and the projection forming surface 156 can travel at a speed V3 that can be slower than VI and can be equal to V2. The percentage of supercharging (OF), the ratio in which the layer of projections 94 can be fed into the shaping surface of projections 156, can be defined as OF = [(Vi / V3) - 1] xlOO where Vi is the velocity of output of the projection layer 94 and V3 is the output velocity of the material oriented towards the resulting body 28 and the velocity of the projection forming surface 156. (When the charge roller 160 is used to increase the velocity of the incoming material on the forming surface of projections 156 it should be noted that the velocity VI of the material after the supercharging roller 160 will be more faster than the velocity VI upstream of the boost roller 160. In the calculation of the supercharging ratio, this faster speed VI must be used.) The good formation of the projections 90 has been found to occur when the supercharging ratio is between about 10 and about 50 percent. It is also indicated that this technique and supercharging ratio can be used with respect not only to the projection layer 94 alone but to a combination of the projection layer 94 and the support layer 92 while collectively feeding on the forming surface of projections 156.

In order to minimize the length of the projection layer 94 supporting its own weight before being subjected to the entanglement fluid 176 and to prevent wrinkling and folding of the projection layer 94, the charge roller 160 can be used to bring the layer of projections 94 to the velocity VI to a position near the texturing zone 178 on the surface forming projections 156. In the example illustrated in Figure 22, the charge roller 160 can be operated outside the conveyor belt 152, but it is also possible to operate it separately in order not to put undue stress on the layer of incoming projections 94. The support layer 92 may be fed in the texturing zone 178 separately from the projection layer 94 and at a velocity V2 which may be greater, equal to or less than the velocity V3 of the projection forming surface 156 and greater, equal, or less than the velocity VI of the projection layer 94. In one embodiment, the support layer 92 may enter the texturing zone 178 by frictional engagement with the projection layer 94 placed on the projection forming surface 156. and thus once on the projection forming surface 156, the support layer 92 can have a surface velocity close to the velocity V3 of the projection forming surface 156 or it can be positively fed into the texturing zone 178 at a speed close to the velocity V3 of the projection forming surface 156. The texturing process may cause some contraction of the support layer 92 in the machine direction. The supercharging of either the support layer 92 or the projection layer 94 can be adjusted according to the particular materials and equipment and the conditions that are used so that the excess material that is fed into the Texturizing zone 178 can be consumed which thus avoids any unsightly wrinkle in the resulting material facing body 28. As a result, the two layers (92 and 94) may be under some tension at all times despite the overfeeding process. The take-off velocity of the body-facing material 28 can be arranged to be close to the velocity V3 of the projection-forming surface 156 so that excessive tension is not applied to the material facing the body 28 in its removal from the surface of projection conformation 156. Such excessive tension would be detrimental to the clarity and size of the projections 90.

An alternative embodiment of the process and apparatus may be shown in Figure 23 in which like reference numbers are used for similar elements. In this embodiment, the main differences in relation to the process and apparatus shown in Figure 22 are a preliminary entanglement of the projection layer 94 to improve its integrity before further processing through a tangled fluid entanglement device. previous 158a; a lamination of the projection layer 94 to the support layer 92 through a laminating fluid entanglement device 158b; and an increase in the number of fluid entanglement devices 158 (referred to as fluid entanglement devices of projections 158c, 158d, and 158e) and therefore an enlargement of the texturing zone 178 on the surface forming projections 156 in the projection forming portion of the process.

The layer of projections 94 can be supplied to the apparatus 150 via the conveyor belt 152. As the layer of projections 94 travels on the transfer belt 152 it can be subjected to a first fluid entanglement device 158a to improve the integrity of the Projection layer 94. This may be referred to as preliminary entanglement of the projection layer 94. As a result, the conveyor 152 may be permeable to fluids to allow the entanglement fluid 176 to pass through the projection layer 94 and the conveyor belt 152. To remove the entangled fluid 176 that is delivered, as in Figure 22, a fluid removal system 162 can be used below the conveyor belt 152. The fluid pressure from the first fluid entanglement device 158a may be in the range of about 10 to about 50 bar.

The backing layer 92 and the backing layer 94 can be fed into a roll forming surface 180 with the first surface 96 of the backing layer 92 oriented towards and in contact with the roll forming surface 180 and the second surface 98. of the support layer 92 in contact with the inner surface 102 of the projection layer 94. In order to entangle the two layers (92 and 94) together, one or more fluid entanglement devices 158b may be used in connection with the lamination forming surface 180 to affect the entanglement of the fiber between the layers. two layers (92 and 94). A fluid removal system 162 can be used to discard the entanglement fluid 176. To distinguish the apparatus in this lamination portion of the overall process from the posterior projection forming portion where the projections are formed, this equipment and the process are known as lamination equipment as opposed to projection forming equipment. Therefore, this portion is referred to as using a laminating shaping surface 180 and a laminating fluid entangling device 158b which uses jets of rolling fluid as opposed to the shaping shaping jets. The lamination shaping surface 180 can be movable in the machine direction of the apparatus 150 at a speed of the rolling shaping surface and must be permeable to the entanglement fluid emanating from the laminating fluid jets located in the device of entanglement by lamination fluid 158b. The laminating fluid entanglement device 158b may have a plurality of laminating fluid jets which are capable of emitting a plurality of pressurized fluid streams of tangled fluid 176 in a direction toward the roll forming surface 180. The roll forming surface 180, when in the configuration of a drum as shown in Figure 23, may have a plurality of holes in its surface separated by contact areas to make it permeable to fluids or can be made of conventional shaping wire which is also permeable. In this portion of the apparatus 150, the complete joining of the two layers (92 and 94) is not necessary. The process parameters for this portion of the equipment are similar to those of the projection shaping portion and the description of the equipment and the process in relation to Figure 22. Therefore, the speeds of the layers (92 and 94) and the surfaces in the rolling forming portion of the equipment and the process can be varied as explained above with respect to the screen forming equipment and the process described with respect to Figure 22.

For example, the layer of projections 94 can be fed in the rolling forming process and on the supporting layer 92 at a speed that can be higher than the speed at which the supporting layer 92 can be fed onto the forming surface of the substrate. lamination 180. With regard to the pressures of the entanglement fluid, jet pressures of the rolling fluid may be desired less in this portion of the equipment while the additional entanglement of the layers may occur during the shaping portion of the process. As a result, the rolling forming pressures of the rolling entanglement device 158b can vary between about 30 and about 100 bar.

When the plurality of rolling fluid streams 176 in the rolling fluid entanglement device 158b are directed in a direction from the outer surface 104 of the projection layer 94 towards the forming forming surface 180, at least a portion of The fibers in the projection layer 94 can be entangled with the support layer 92 to form a laminated weft. Once the projection layer 94 and the support layer 92 are joined in a laminated web, the laminated web can leave the rolling portion of the equipment and the process (elements 158b and 180) and can be fed into the projection conformation portion of the equipment and the process (optional elements 156, 158c, 158d, 158e and 160) ). As with the process shown in Figure 22, the laminated web can be fed onto the projection forming surface 156 at the same speed as the projection forming surface 156 travels or can be supercharged on the projection forming surface 156 by use of the roller overfeeding 160 or simply causing the laminated web to travel at a velocity VI that is greater than the velocity V3 of the projection forming surface 156. As a result, the process variables described above with respect to FIG. 22 can also be employed with the equipment and process shown in Figure 23. Also, as with the apparatus and materials in Figure 22, if the turbocharger 160 is used to increase the velocity VI of the laminated web, when it comes into contact with the surface of forming projections 156, it is this speed VI faster after the boost roller 160 that should be used in the calculation of the supercharging ratio. The same approach can be used when calculating the supercharging ratio with the rest of the modalities shown in Figures 24-27 if material overfeeding is used.

In the equipment projection shaping portion, a plurality of tangled fluid pressure projection fluid streams 176 may be directed from the projection fluid jets located in the projection fluid entanglement devices (158c, 158d, and 158e) in the web laminated in a direction from the first surface 96 of the support layer 92 to the projection forming surface 156 to cause a first plurality of the fibers of the backing layer. projections 94 in the vicinity of the shaping holes 170 that are located in the shaping surface of projections 156 are directed into the shaping holes 170 to form the plurality of projections 90 extending outward from the outer surface 104 of the layer of projections 94 thus forming the material facing the body entangled by fluid 28. As with the other processes, the body facing material 28 can be removed from the surface forming projections 156 and, if desired, can be additional processing, the same or different as described with respect to the process and apparatus of Figure 22 such as drying to remove excess entanglement fluid or subsequent bonding or other steps. In the projection shaping portion of the apparatus and apparatus 150, the projection shaping pressures of the projection fluid entanglement devices 158c, 158d, and 158e may vary from about 80 to about 200 bar.

A further modification of the process and apparatus 150 of Figure 23 can be illustrated in Figure 24. In Figure 23, as well as also the embodiments illustrated in Figures 25 and 27, the material facing the fluid-entangled body 28 can be subjected to a pre-lamination stage by means of the forming surface lamination 180 and one entanglement device (s) by lamination fluid 158b. In each of these configurations (Figures 23, 25 and 27), the material that is in direct contact with the laminating forming surface 180 is the first surface 96 of the supporting layer 92. However, it is also possible to reverse the support layer 92 and the layer of projections 94 as shown in Figure 24 so that the outer surface 104 of the layer of projections 94 is the side that is in direct contact with the forming surface 180.

Another embodiment of the process and the apparatus may be illustrated in Figure 25. This embodiment may be similar to that shown in Figure 23, except that only the projection layer 94 may be pre-entangled by the use of the entanglement devices. by fluid 158a and 158b before the layer of projections 94 is fed into the portion of the projection formation of the equipment. In addition, the support layer 92 can be fed into the texturing zone 178 on the projection forming surface 156 in the same manner as in Figure 12 although the texturing zone 178 can be supplied with multiple fluid entanglement devices (158c, 158d and 158e).

Figure 26 represents another mode of the process and Apparatus which, as in Figure 23, can contact the projection layer 94 and the support layer 92 with one another for a lamination treatment in a rolling portion of the equipment and the process by using a surface of roll forming 180 (which may be the same element as the conveyor 152) and a rolling fluid entanglement device 158b. Further, as the embodiment of Figure 23, in the texturing zone 178 of the process projection shaping portion and apparatus 150, multiple projection fluid entanglement devices 158c and 158d can be used.

Figure 27 depicts another embodiment of the process and the apparatus 150. In Figure 27, the main difference is that the projection layer 94 may undergo a first treatment with entanglement fluid 176 through a fluid entanglement device of projections 158c in the texturing zone 178 before the second surface 98 of the support layer 92 comes into contact with the interior surface 102 of the projection layer 94 for fluid entanglement through the projection fluid entanglement device 158d . In this way, an initial formation of the projections 90 can begin without the support layer 92 being in place. As a result, it can be desired that the fluid entanglement device of projections 158c operate at a pressure less than that of the fluid entanglement device 158d. For example, the projection fluid entanglement device 158c can be operated in a pressure range of about 100 to about 140 bar while the projection fluid entanglement device 158d can be operated in a pressure range of about 140 to about 200. Pub. Other combinations and pressure ranges may be selected depending on the operating conditions of the equipment and the types and base weights of the materials that are used for the projection layer 94 and the support layer 92.

In each of the process modes and the apparatus 150, the fibers in the projection layer 94 can be sufficiently separated and moved within the projection layer 94 so that the entanglement fluid 176 emanating from the projection fluid jets in the texturing zone 178 can move a sufficient number of the fibers out of the XY plane of the projection layer 94 in the vicinity of the forming holes 170 in the projection forming surface 156 and push the fibers down into the holes of forming 170 which thus forms the projections 90 in the layer of projections 94 of the material facing the body 28 and / or the fluid transfer layer 78. Furthermore, by the supercharging of at least the layer of projections 94 in the region from Texturing 178, better conformation of projections can be achieved as shown by the examples and photomicrographs.

Secondary coating: In various embodiments, the body facing material 28 of the absorbent article 10 can overlap the absorbent body 40 and the outer covering 26 and can isolate the skin of the wearer from the liquid residues retained by the absorbent body 40. In various embodiments, the body oriented material 28 may overlap a secondary liner 34. In such embodiments, the secondary liner 34 may overlap the absorbent body 40. In various embodiments, a fluid transfer layer 78 may be positioned between the secondary liner 34 and the absorbent body. 40. In various embodiments, an acquisition layer 84 may be positioned between the secondary liner 34 and the absorbent body 40 or a fluid transfer layer 78, if present. In various embodiments, the secondary liner 34 may be attached to the acquisition layer 84, or to the fluid transfer layer 78 if the acquisition layer 84 is not present, through adhesive and / or by melting point bonding. In other embodiments, the secondary liner 34 can be attached additionally and / or alternatively to the absorbent body 40 by means of adhesive and / or by a fusion point union. The melting point bond can be selected from ultrasonic, thermal, pressure, and combinations thereof. In some embodiments, such as depicted in Figure 14B, the secondary liner 34 may include a plurality of openings 27.

In one embodiment, the secondary liner 34 may extend beyond the absorbent body 40 and / or a fluid transfer layer 78, and / or an acquisition layer 84 to overlap a portion of the outer liner 26 and may be attached to it by any method that is considered suitable, such as, for example, by being bonded thereto by means of an adhesive, to substantially enclose the absorbent body 40 between the outer covering 26 and the secondary coating 34. The secondary coating 34 may be narrower than the outer coating 26, but it should be understood that the secondary coating 34 and the outer coating 26 can be of the same dimensions. It is also contemplated that the secondary liner 34 may not extend beyond the absorbent body 40 and / or may not be secured to the outer liner 26. The secondary liner 34 may be suitably compliant, soft-touch, and non-irritating to the skin of the skin. carrier and may be the same or less hydrophilic than the absorbent body 40 to allow exudates Bodies penetrate easily through the absorbent body 40 and provide a relatively dry surface to the wearer.

Secondary liner 34 can be manufactured from a wide selection of materials, such as synthetic fibers (e.g., polyester or polypropylene fibers), natural fibers (e.g., wood or cotton fibers), a combination of natural and synthetic fibers , porous foams, cross-linked foams, perforated plastic films, or the like. Examples of suitable materials include, but are not limited to, rayon, wood, cotton, polyester, polypropylene, polyethylene, nylon, or other heat-stable fibers, polyolefins, such as, but not limited to, copolymers of polypropylene and polyethylene, polyethylene linear low density, and aliphatic esters such as polylactic acid, finely perforated film webs, mesh materials, and the like, as well as combinations thereof.

Various woven and non-woven fabrics can be used for the coating 34. The secondary coating layer 34 may include a woven fabric, a nonwoven fabric, a polymeric film, a laminate of films and fabrics, or the like, as well as combinations thereof. Examples of a non-woven fabric include spunbond fabric, blown cloth, coform fabric, carded weft, weft heat-treated carded, bicomponent, hydroligative spunbond, or the like, as well as combinations thereof.

For example, the secondary coating 34 may be composed of a spinning or meltblown web of polyolefin fibers. Alternatively, the secondary coating 34 can be a thermoformed carded web composed of natural and / or synthetic fibers. The secondary coating 34 may be composed of a substantially hydrophobic material, and the hydrophobic material may optionally be treated with a surfactant or otherwise processed to impart a desired level of wettability and hydrophilicity. The surfactant may be applied by any conventional means, such as spraying, printing, brushing or the like. The surfactant can be applied to the entire secondary coating 34 or can be applied selectively to particular sections of the secondary coating 34. In one embodiment, the secondary coating 34 can be treated with a modifier that can increase the surface energy of the material surface or reduce the properties viscoelastic of body exudates, such as menstruation.

In one embodiment, a secondary liner 34 can be constructed of a two-component nonwoven web. The plot Two-component non-woven fabric can be a two-component spunbond web, or a two-component thermobonded carded web. An example of a bicomponent short fiber includes a polypropylene / polypropylene bicomponent fiber. In this particular bicomponent fiber, polypropylene forms the core and polyethylene forms the fiber sheath. Fibers having other orientations, such as multiple lobes, side by side, end-to-end can be used without departing from the scope of this disclosure. In one embodiment, a secondary coating 34 can be a spunbond substrate with a basis weight of about 10 or 12 to about 15 or 20 g / m2. In one embodiment, a secondary coating 34 can be a 12 g / m2 spunbond-spunbond-spunbond bonding substrate having 10% blown-fused content applied between the two spunbond layers.

Although the outer skin 26 and the secondary skin 34 may include elastomeric materials, it is contemplated that the outer skin 26 and the secondary skin 34 may be composed of materials that are generally non-elastomeric. In one embodiment, the secondary liner 34 may be stretchable, and more suitably elastic. In one embodiment, the secondary liner 34 may be suitably stretchable and more suitably resilient in at least the lateral direction or circumferential of the absorbent article 10. In other aspects, the secondary liner 34 may be stretchable, and more suitably elastic, in both the lateral and longitudinal directions.

Containment fins: In one embodiment, the containment fins, 50 and 52, can be secured to the body facing material 28 and / or, if present, to the secondary coating 34, of the absorbent article 10 in a separate relationship generally parallel to each other laterally toward the interior of the leg openings 56 to provide a barrier against the flow of body exudates toward the openings of the legs 56. In one embodiment, the containment flaps, 50 and 52, may extend longitudinally from the front region of the waist 12 of the absorbent article 10, through the crotch region 16 to the back region of the waist 14 of the absorbent article 10. The containment flaps, 50 and 52, can be attached to the body facing material 28 and / or the coating secondary 34 by an adhesive seam 137 to define a fixed proximal end 138 of the containment fins, 50 and 52.

The containment fins, 50 and 52, may be constructed of a fibrous material that may be similar to the material that forms the body-oriented material 28 and / or the secondary coating 34, if present. also can other conventional material, such as polymer films, can be used. Each containment fin, 50 and 52, may have a movable distal end 136 which may include the fin elastics, such as the fin elastics 58 and 60, respectively. Elastic materials suitable for the fin elastics, 58 and 60, may include sheets, strands or ribbons of natural rubber, synthetic rubber, or thermoplastic elastomeric materials.

The fin elastics, 58 and 60, as illustrated, may have two strands of elastomeric material extending longitudinally along the distal ends 136 of the containment fins, 50 and 52, in spaced relation generally parallel to each other. The elastic strands may be inside the containment fins, 50 and 52, although in a condition it is elastically shrunk so that the contraction of the strands folds and shortens the distal ends 136 of the containment fins, 50 and 52. As a result, the elastic strands can deflect the distal ends 136 of each containment fin, 50 and 52, to a position spaced from the proximal end 138 of the containment fins, 50 and 52, so that the containment fins, 50 and 52, can extending away from the body facing material 28 and / or the secondary coating 34 in a generally vertical orientation of the containment fins, 50 and 52, especially in the region of the crotch 16 of the absorbent article 10, when the absorbent article 10 fits on the wearer. The distal end 136 of the containment fins, 50 and 52, can be connected to the fin elastics, 58 and 60, by bending the material of the containment fins, 50 and 52, on itself in an amount that can be It is to be understood, however, that the containment fins, 50 and 52, may have any number of strands of elastomeric material and may also be omitted in the absorbent article 10 without departing from the scope. of this description.

In some embodiments, the body-oriented material 28 may extend below the distal end 136 of the containment fins, 50 and 52. Such a configuration of the material facing the body 28 may assist the distal end 136 of the containment fins, 50 and 52, to be held straight when the absorbent article 10 is worn, which thus helps improve the sealing effect of the containment flaps, 50 and 52, against the wearer's skin, as well as increasing the amount of void volume in the carrier. the region of destination of the insult contained by the containment fins 52. Additionally, in some embodiments where the fluid transfer layer 78 includes the projections 90 (such as depicted in Figure 12), the fluid transfer layer 78 can extend below the distal end 136 of the containment fins, 50 and 52, and thus, can provide similar benefits to the absorbent article 10.

Elastic legs: The elastic members of the legs, 66 and 68, can be secured between the outer and inner layers, 70 and 72, respectively, of the outer covering 26, such as by bonding together with laminated adhesive, generally adjacent to the lateral outer edges of the inner layer 72 of the outer covering 26. Alternatively, the elastic leg members, 66 and 68, may be disposed between other layers of the absorbent article 10. For example, the elastic leg members, 66 and 68, may be disposed between the cover outer 26 and the proximal ends 138 of the containment fins, 50 and 52, as shown in Figures 7-9. For the elastic leg members, 66 and 68, a wide variety of elastic materials can be used. Suitable elastic materials may include sheets, strands or tapes of natural rubber, synthetic rubber, or thermoplastic elastomeric materials. The elastic materials can be stretched and fixed to a substrate, fixed to a shirred substrate, or fixed to a substrate and then elastized or shrunk, for example, with the application of heat, so that the elastic shrinkage forces are imparted to the substrate.

Fastening system: In one embodiment, the absorbent article 10 may include a fastening system. The fastening system may include one or more rear fasteners 140 and one or more front fasteners 142. The portions of the fastening system may be included in the front region of the waist 12, the back region of the waist 14, or both. The fastening system can be configured to secure the absorbent article 10 around the wearer's waist and hold the absorbent article 10 in place during use. In one embodiment, the rear fasteners 140 may include one or more materials bonded together to form a composite ear as is known in the art. For example, the composite fastener can be composed of a stretching component 144, a nonwoven carrier or a hook base 146, and a fastening component 148.

Elastic waist members: In one embodiment, the absorbent article 10 may have elastic waist members, 62 and 64, which may be formed of any suitable elastic material. In such an embodiment, suitable elastic materials may include, but are not limited to, sheets, strands or ribbons of natural rubber, synthetic rubber, or thermoplastic elastomeric polymers. Elastic materials can stretch and bind to a substrate, join a shirred substrate, or join to a substrate and then elasticized or shrunk, for example, with the application of heat, so that the elastic retraction forces are imparted to the substrate. It should be understood, however, that the elastic waist members 62 and 64 can be omitted from the absorbent article 10 without departing from the scope of this description.

Side panels: In a mode in which the absorbent article 10 can be a training pant, youth panty, diaper brief, or absorbent adult brief, the absorbent article 10 can have front side panels, 182 and 184, and rear side panels, 186 and 188. Figure 28 provides a non-limiting illustration of an absorbent article 10 that may have side panels, such as front side panels, 182 and 184, and rear side panels, 186 and 188. The front side panels 182 and 184 and the panels rear side panels 186 and 188 of the absorbent article 10 can be attached to the absorbent article 10 in the respective front and rear waist regions, 12 and 14, and can extend outwardly beyond the longitudinal side edges, 18 and 20, of the absorbent article 10. In one example, the front side panels, 182 and 184, may be attached to the inner layer 72 of the outer skin 26, as it is attached to these by a adhesive, by bonding by pressure, by thermal bonding or by bonding by ultrasound These front side panels, 182 and 184, can also be attached to the outer layer 70 of the outer shell 26, such as by adhesive bonding, pressure bonding, thermal bonding, or ultrasonic bonding. The rear side panels, 186 and 188, can be fixed to the outer and inner layers, 70 and 72, respectively, of the outer covering 26 in the rear region of the waist 14 of the absorbent article 10 in substantially the same manner as the front side panels. , 182 and 184. Alternatively, the front side panels, 182 and 184, and the rear side panels, 186 and 188, may be formed integrally with the absorbent article 10, such as integrally formed with the outer covering 26, the material facing the rear. body 28, secondary coating 34 or other layers of absorbent article 10.

For a better fit and appearance, the front side panels, 182 and 184, and the rear side panels, 186 and 188, may suitably have an average length, measured parallel to the longitudinal axis of the absorbent article 10 which is about 20 percent or more, and more suitably about 25 percent or more, of the total length of the absorbent article 10, which is also measured parallel to the longitudinal axis. For example, the absorbent articles 10 having a total length of about 54 centimeters, the front side panels, 182 and 184, and the rear side panels, 186 and 188, suitably have an average length of about 10 centimeters or more, and more adequately have an average length of about 15 centimeters. Each of the front side panels, 182 and 184, and the rear side panels, 186 and 188, may be constructed of one or more individual pieces of material. For example, each front side panel, 182 and 184, and rear side panel, 186 and 188, may include first and second side panel portions (not shown) joined by a seam (not shown), with at least one of the portions that includes an elastomeric material. Alternatively, each individual front side panel, 182 and 184, and rear side panel, 186 and 188, may be constructed from a single piece of material folded over itself along an intermediate fold line (not shown).

The front side panels, 182 and 184, and the rear side panels, 186 and 188, may each have an outer edge 190 laterally spaced from the mating seam 192, an end edge of the leg 194 disposed towards the longitudinal center of the article. absorbent 10, and an end edge of the waist 196 disposed towards a longitudinal end of the absorbent article 10. The end edge of the leg 194 and the end edge of the waist 196 may extending from the longitudinal side edges, 18 and 20, of the absorbent article 10 to the outer edges 190. The end edges of the legs 194 of the front side panels, 182 and 184, and the rear side panels, 186 and 188, can form part of the longitudinal side edges, 18 and 20, of the absorbent article 10. The end edges of the legs 194 of the illustrated absorbent article 10 can be curved and / or angled with respect to the transverse axis to provide a better fit around the legs of the carrier However, it is understood that only one of the end edges of the legs 194 can be curved or angled, such as the extreme edge of the leg 194 of the back region of the waist 14, or none of the extreme edges of the legs. 194 can bend or be angled, without departing from the scope of this description. The end edges of the waist 196 may be parallel to the transverse axis. The end edges of the waist 196 of the front side panels, 182 and 184, may form part of the front edge of the waist 22 of the absorbent article 10, and the end edges of the waist 196 of the rear side panels, 186 and 188, they may form part of the rear edge of the waist 24 of the absorbent article 10.

The front side panels, 182 and 184, and the rear side panels, 186 and 188, may include a Elastic material able to stretch laterally. Suitable elastic materials, as well as a process described for the incorporation of front side panels, 182 and 184, and rear side panels, 186 and 188, elastics in an absorbent article 10 are described in the following U.S. Pat. 4,940,464 issued July 10, 1990 to Van Gompel et al., U.S. Pat. 5,224,405 granted on July 6, 1993 to Pohjola, U.S. Patent No. 5,104,116 issued April 14, 1992 to Pohjola, and U.S. Patent No. 5,046,272 issued September 10, 1991 to Vogt et al .; all of which are incorporated herein by reference. As an example, suitable elastic materials include a thermosettable laminate (STL), a narrow-gauge heat-bonded laminate (NBL), reversibly-layered laminate, or a stretch-bonded laminate (SBL). The methods of making such materials are well known to those skilled in the art and are described in U.S. Patent No. 4,663,220 issued May 5, 1987 to Wisneski et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,226,992, issued in US Pat. July 13, 1993 to Morman, and European patent application no. EP 0 217 032 published April 8, 1987, on behalf of Taylor et al., And PCT application WO 01/88245 on behalf of Welch and others, all of which are incorporated herein by reference. Other suitable materials are described in U.S. Patent Application No. 12 / 649,508 from Welch et al. And 12 / 023,447 from Lake et al., All of which are incorporated herein by reference. Alternatively, the front side panels, 182 and 184, and the rear side panels, 186 and 188, may include other non-woven or woven materials, such as those described above as being suitable for the outer coating 26 or secondary coating 34, compounds that are previously tensioned mechanically, or stretchable but not elastic materials.

Product for feminine hygiene: Figure 29 provides a non-limiting illustration of an absorbent article 10 in the form of a feminine hygiene product such as a menstrual pad or an adult incontinence product for females. The absorbent article 10 may have a lengthwise longitudinal direction 30 that may extend along a designated X axis of the absorbent article 10, and a lateral transverse direction 32 that may extend along a designated Y axis of the absorbent article 10. Additionally, the absorbent article 10 may include the first and second longitudinally opposite end portions, 13 and 15, and an intermediate region 17 located between the portions of end, 13 and 15. The absorbent article 10 may have first and second longitudinal side edges, 18 and 20, which may be the longitudinal sides of the elongate absorbent article 10. The longitudinal side edges, 18 and 20, may be contoured to match the shape of the absorbent article 10. The absorbent article 10 may have any desired shape, for example, a dog bone shape, a runway shape, an hourglass shape, or similar. Additionally, the absorbent article 10 may be substantially longitudinally symmetric, or may be longitudinally asymmetric, as desired.

As shown representatively the longitudinal dimension of the absorbent article 10 can be relatively larger than the lateral transverse dimension of the absorbent article 10. The configurations of the absorbent article 10 can include a body oriented material 28 and an outer covering 26, as describes in the present. An absorbent body 40, as described herein, may be placed between the material facing the body 28 and the outer covering 26. As representatively shown, for example, the peripheries of the material facing the body 28 and the outer covering 26 may be substantially completely abutting or the peripheries of the material oriented towards the body 28 and the outer covering 26 may be non-abutting partially or not at all. In one embodiment, the absorbent article 10 may include a secondary liner 34 as described herein. In one embodiment, the absorbent article 10 may include an acquisition layer 84 as described herein. In one embodiment, the absorbent article 10 may include a fluid transfer layer 78 as described herein.

In an embodiment in which the absorbent article 10 can be a feminine hygiene product, the absorbent article 10 can include laterally extending wing portions 198, which can be integrally connected to the side edges, 18 and 20, of the absorbent article 10 in the intermediate region 17 of the absorbent article 10. For example, the wing portions 198 can be separately provided members that are subsequently joined or otherwise operatively joined to the intermediate region 17 of the absorbent article 10. In other configurations, the wing portions 198 can be formed unitarily with one or more components of the absorbent article 10. As an example, a wing portion 198 can be formed from a corresponding operative extension of the body facing material 28, a secondary liner 34. , if present, an outer coating 26, and combinations of them.

The wing portions 198 may have a designated storage position (not shown) in which the wing portions 198 are generally directed inward towards the longitudinally extending center line 31. In various embodiments, the wing portion 198 which is connected to a side edge, such as the side edge 18, may have sufficient length in the transverse direction to extend and continue beyond the center line 31 to approach the laterally opposite lateral edge 20 of the absorbent article 10. The storage position of the wing portions 198 may ordinarily represent an arrangement that is observed when the absorbent article 10 is first removed from its wrapping or other packaging. Before placing the absorbent article 10, such as the feminine hygiene product, on the body facing side of the undergarment prior to use, the wing portions 198 may be selectively arranged to extend laterally from the side edges, 18 and 20 of the intermediate region 17 of the absorbent article 10. After placing the absorbent article 10 on the undergarment, the wing portions 198 can be wrapped and operatively secured around the side edges of the undergarment to help contain the absorbent article 10. in its place, so that it is well known in the matter.

The wing portions 198 may have any operative construction and may include a layer of any operative material. In addition, each wing portion 198 may comprise a composite material. For example, the wing portions 198 may include a spunbond fabric material, a bicomponent spunbond material, a spunbond bonding material, a stretched stretch-bonded laminate (NBL), a cloth material meltblown, a thermoformed carded web, a thermobonded thermal carded web, a thermobonded carded pass-through web, or the like, as well as combinations thereof.

Each wing portion 198 may include a panel fastener component (not shown) that can be operatively joined to a designated mating surface of the wing portion 198 associated with it. The panel fastener component may include a system of interlocking mechanical fasteners, a system of adhesive fasteners, or the like, as well as combinations thereof. In one embodiment, either or both of the wing portions 198 may include a panel fastener system incorporating an operative adhesive. The adhesive can be a solvent-based adhesive, a hot-melt adhesive, a pressure-sensitive adhesive, or the like, as well as combinations thereof.

In one embodiment, a garment-engaging mechanism (not shown), such as a garment-binding adhesive, can be distributed on the garment-facing side of the absorbent article 10. In one embodiment, the garment adhesive it can be distributed on the garment-facing side of the absorbent article 10 of the outer covering 26, and one or more layers or sheets of release material can be removably placed on the garment adhesive for storage before use. In one embodiment, the garment attachment mechanism may include an operative component of a mechanical fastening system. In such an embodiment, the garment attachment mechanism may include an operative component of a hook and loop type fastening system.

Decolorizing composition: In one embodiment, a chemical treatment can be used to alter the color of the body exudates captured by the absorbent article 10. In one embodiment, for example, the treatment can be a bleaching composition that agglutinates (agglomerates) the red blood cells and menstruation and limits the extent to which the red color of menstruation is visible. Such a composition includes a surfactant, such as is described in U.S. Pat. 6,350,711 of Potts, and others, which is incorporated herein in its entirety as a reference thereto. The non-limiting examples of such surfactants include Pluronic® surfactants (triblock copolymer surfactant), inorganic salts containing a polyvalent anion (eg, divalent, trivalent, etc.), such as sulfate (SO42 ·), phosphate (P043 ~) , carbonate (CO32), oxide (O2-), etc., and a monovalent cation, such as sodium (Na +), potassium (K +), lithium (Li +), ammonium (NH4 +), etc. Alkali metal cations are also beneficial. Some examples of salts formed from such ions include, but are not limited to, disodium sulfate (Na2SO4), dipotassium sulfate (K2S04), disodium carbonate (Na2CC> 3), dipotassium carbonate (K2CO3), monosodium phosphate (NaH2P04), disodium phosphate (Na2HP04), monopotassium phosphate (KH2P04), dipotassium phosphate (K2HP04), etc. Mixtures of the aforementioned salts can also be effective in facilitating the physical separation of red blood cells. For example, a mixture of disodium sulfate (Na2SO4) and monopotassium phosphate (KH2P04) can be used.

In addition to the binding agents, the bleaching composition can alter the chemical structure of the hemoglobin to change its color. Examples of such compositions are described in United States patent application publication no. 2009/0062764 by MacDonald, et al., Which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In one embodiment, the composition may include an oxidizing agent that may be generally able to oxidize hemoglobin or other substances responsible for the unwanted color of body exudates. Some examples of oxidizing agents include, but are not limited to, peroxygen bleaches (e.g., hydrogen peroxide, percarbonates, persulfates, perborates, peroxyacids, alkyl hydroperoxides, peroxides, diacyl peroxides, ozonides, superoxides, oxo-ozonides, and periodates); hydroperoxides (for example, terbutyl hydroperoxide, cumyl hydroperoxide, 2,4,4-trimethylpentyl-2-hydroperoxide, diisopropylbenzene monohydroperoxide, teramyl hydroperoxide and 2,5-dimethylhexane-2,5-dihydroperoxide); peroxides (e.g., lithium peroxide, sodium peroxide, potassium peroxide, ammonium peroxide, calcium peroxide, rubidium peroxide, cesium peroxide, strontium peroxide, barium peroxide, magnesium peroxide, mercury peroxide, peroxide silver, zirconium peroxide, hafnium peroxide, titanium peroxide, phosphorus peroxide, sulfur peroxide, rhenium peroxide, iron peroxide, cobalt peroxide, and nickel peroxide); perborates (for example, sodium perborate, potassium perborate, and ammonium perborate), - persulfates (for example, sodium persulfate, potassium dipersulfate and potassium persulfate); etc. Other suitable oxidizing agents include, but are not limited to, fatty acids omega-3 and -6, such as linoleic acid, a-linoleic acid, arachidonic acid, eicosapentaenoic acid, docosahexaenoic acid, eicosadienoic acid, eicosatrienoic acid, etc.

The bleaching composition can be applied to any liquid-permeable layer of the absorbent article 10 where it can be contacted with aqueous fluids exuded by the body, such as, for example, menstruation, such as the body-facing layer. , the secondary coating 34, the acquisition layer 84, the fluid transfer layer 78, the absorbent body 40, the outer covering 26, and combinations thereof. In one embodiment, the decolorizing composition can be applied to only a portion of the surface of the layer (s) to which it is applied to ensure that the layer (s) can still retain Sufficient absorbing properties. In one embodiment, it may be desired that the decolorizing composition be placed closer to the absorbent body 40. In one embodiment, an additional layer (not shown) may be employed in the absorbent article 10 and may be applied with the decolorizing composition that is in contact with the absorbent article 10. the absorbent body 40. The additional layer may be formed from a variety of different porous materials, such as a perforated film, a nonwoven web (e.g., cellulose web, spunbond web, web fused by blown, etc.), foams, etc. In one embodiment, the additional layer may be in the form of a hollow enclosure (eg, pouch, pouch, etc.) that is folded so as to surround the absorbent body 40 partially or completely. The decolorizing composition can be disposed within this enclosure so that it remains sealed therein before use.

Non-limiting examples of types of absorbent articles: In one embodiment, an absorbent article 10 may have an outer covering 26, an absorbent body 40, and a material facing the body 28. In such an embodiment, the material facing the body 28 may have a support layer 92 and a layer of projections 94. In such an embodiment, the layer of projections 94 may have an inner surface 102 and an outer surface 104 and may have a plurality of hollow projections 90 extending from the outer surface 104 of the projection layer 94. In several embodiments, the body-oriented material 28 of the absorbent article 10 may further include a contact area 116 with more than about 1% open area within a selected area of the material facing the body 28, the projections 90 with less of about 1% open area within a selected area of the material facing the body 28, a plurality of fibers of the projection layer 94 entangled with the support layer 92, a load of more than about 2 Newton per 25 mm width to 10% extension in the machine direction, the projections 90 having a greater height about 1 mm, a resilience of more than about 70%, and combinations thereof. In various embodiments, the absorbent article 10 may further include a secondary liner 34 positioned between the material facing the body 28 and the absorbent body 40. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may be free of superabsorbent material. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may have more than about 15% superabsorbent material. In several embodiments, the open area of the projections 90 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers. In various embodiments, the open area of the contact area 116 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers.

In one embodiment, an absorbent article 10 may have an outer covering 26, an absorbent body 40, a body facing material 28 and a secondary coating 34 positioned between the material facing the body 28 and the absorbent body 40. In such an embodiment , the body facing material 28 may have a support layer 92 and a layer of projections 94. In such an embodiment, the layer of projections 94 may have a surface inner 102 and an outer surface 104 and may have a plurality of hollow projections 90 extending from the outer surface 104 of the projection layer 94. In various embodiments, the body-facing material 28 of the absorbent article 10 may also include , a contact area 116 with more than about 1% open area within a selected area of the material facing the body 28, the projections 90 with less than about 1% open area within a selected area of the material facing the body 28, a plurality of fibers of the projection layer 94 entangled with the support layer 92, a load of more than about 2 Newton per 25 mm width to 10% extension in the machine direction, the projections 90 which they have a height greater than about 1 mm, a resilience of more than about 70%, and combinations thereof. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may be free of superabsorbent material. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may have more than about 15% superabsorbent material. In several embodiments, the open area of the projections 90 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers. In various embodiments, the open area of the contact areas 116 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers.

In one embodiment, an absorbent article 10 may have an outer covering 26, an absorbent body 40, and a material facing the body 28. In such an embodiment, the body facing material 28 may have a support layer 92 and a layer of projections 94. In such embodiment, the layer of projections 94 may have an inner surface 102 and an outer surface 104 and may have a plurality of hollow projections 90 extending from the outer surface 104 of the projection layer 94. In such an embodiment, the material facing the body 28 may also have a load of more than about 2 Newton per 25 mm width to 10% extension in the machine direction. In various embodiments, the body facing material 28 of the absorbent article 10 may further include a contact area 116 with more than about 1% open area within a selected area of the material facing the body 28, projections with less of about 1% open area within a selected area of the material facing the body 28, a plurality of fibers of the projection layer 94 entangled with the support layer 92, the projections 90 having a height greater than about 1 mm , a resilience of more than approximately 70%, and combinations thereof. In various embodiments, the absorbent article 10 may further include a secondary liner 34 positioned between the material facing the body 28 and the absorbent body 40. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may be free of superabsorbent material. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may have more than about 15% superabsorbent material. In several embodiments, the open area of the projections 90 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers. In various embodiments, the open area of the contact areas 116 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers.

In one embodiment, an absorbent article 10 may have an outer covering 26, an absorbent body 40, and a material facing the body 28. In such an embodiment, the material facing the body 28 may have a support layer 92 and a layer of projections 94. In such an embodiment, the layer of projections 94 may have an inner surface 102 and an outer surface 104 and may have a plurality of hollow projections 90 extending from the outer surface 104 of the projection layer 94. In such a case In this embodiment, the body-oriented material 28 may have a resilience greater than about 70%. In various embodiments, the body facing material 28 of the absorbent article 10 may further include a contact area 116 with more than about 1% open area within a selected area of the material facing the body 28, projections with less of approximately 1% open area within a selected area of the material body-oriented 28, a plurality of fibers from the projection layer 94 entangled with the support layer 92, a load of more than about 2 Newton per 25 mm width to 10% extension in the machine direction, projections 90 having a height greater than about 1 mm, and combinations thereof. In various embodiments, the absorbent article 10 may further include a secondary liner 34 positioned between the material facing the body 28 and the absorbent body 40. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may be free of superabsorbent material. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may have more than about 15% superabsorbent material. In several embodiments, the open area of the projections 90 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers. In various embodiments, the open area of the contact areas 116 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers.

In one embodiment, an absorbent article 10 may have an outer covering 26, an absorbent body 40, and a material facing the body 28 which may have a support layer 92 and a layer of projections 94. The layer of projections 94 may have an inner surface 102 and an outer surface 104 and may have a plurality of hollow projections 90 extending from the outer surface 104 of the projection layer 94. In such an embodiment, the body facing material 28 may have a contact area 116 that may have more than about 1% open area within a selected area of the body facing material 28 and the projections 90 having less than about 1% area open within a selected area of the material facing the body 28. In various embodiments, the body-facing material 28 of the absorbent article 10 may further include a plurality of fibers from the projection layer 94 entangled with the support layer 92, a load of more than about 2 Newton per 25 mm width to 10% extension in the machine direction, the projections 90 having a height greater than about 1 mm, a resilience of more than about 70%, and combinations of them. In various embodiments, the absorbent article 10 may further include a secondary liner 34 positioned between the material facing the body 28 and the absorbent body 40. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may be free of superabsorbent material. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may have more than about 15% superabsorbent material. In several embodiments, the open area of the projections 90 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers. In various embodiments, the open area of the contact areas 116 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers.

In various embodiments, the amount of residual fecal material simulant remaining in the body facing material 28 after an assault with fecal material simulant according to the test method described herein is less than about 2.5 grams. .

In one embodiment, an absorbent article 10 may have an outer covering 26, an absorbent body 40, a material facing the body 28, and a fluid transfer layer 78 positioned between the absorbent body 40 and the material facing the body 28 In such an embodiment, the body facing material 28 may have a support layer 92 and a projection layer 94. In such an embodiment, the projection layer 94 may have an interior surface 102 and an exterior surface 104 and may have a a plurality of hollow projections 90 extending from the outer surface 104 of the projection layer 94. In various embodiments, the fluid transfer layer may contain a polymeric material. In various embodiments, the body-facing material 28 of the absorbent article 10 may further include a contact area 116 with more than about 1% open area within a selected area of the material facing the body 28, the projections 90 which have less than about 1% open area within a selected area of the material facing the body 28, a plurality of fibers of the projection layer 94 entangled with the support layer 92, a load of more than about 2 Newton per 25 mm width to 10% extension in the machine direction, the projections 90 having a height greater than about 1 mm, a resilience of more than about 70%, and combinations thereof. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may be free of superabsorbent material. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may have more than about 15% superabsorbent material. In several embodiments, the open area of the projections 90 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers. In various embodiments, the open area of the contact areas 116 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers. In various embodiments, the amount of residual fecal material simulant remaining in the body facing material 28 after an assault with fecal material simulant according to the test method described herein is less than about 2.5 grams. .

In one embodiment, an absorbent article 10 may have an outer covering 26, an absorbent body 40, a material facing the body 28, an acquisition layer 84 positioned between the absorbent body 40 and the material facing the body 28, and a fluid transfer layer 78 placed between the layer of acquisition 84 and the absorbent body 40. In such an embodiment, the body-facing material 28 may have a support layer 92 and a layer of projections 94. In such an embodiment, the layer of projections 94 may have an interior surface 102 and a outer surface 104 and may have a plurality of hollow projections 90 extending from the outer surface 104 of the projection layer 94. In various embodiments, the acquisition layer 84 may have fibers with a denier of less than about 5. In several embodiments, the fluid transfer layer 78 may contain a cellulosic material. In various embodiments, the body-facing material 28 of the absorbent article 10 may further include a contact area 116 with more than about 1% open area within a selected area of the material facing the body 28, the projections 90 having less than about 1% open area within a selected area of the material facing the body 28, a plurality of fibers from the projection layer 94 entangled with the support layer 92, a load of more than about 2 Newton per 25 mm wide at 10% extension in the machine direction, the projections 90 having a height greater than about 1 mm, a resilience of more than about 70%, and combinations thereof. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 it may be free of superabsorbent material. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may have more than about 15% superabsorbent material. In several embodiments, the open area of the projections 90 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers. In various embodiments, the open area of the contact areas 116 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers. In various embodiments, the amount of residual fecal material simulant remaining in the body facing material 28 after an assault with fecal material simulant according to the test method described herein is less than about 2.5 grams. .

In one embodiment, an absorbent article 10 may have an outer coating 26, an absorbent body 40, a body facing material 28 that may have a support layer 92 and a layer of projections 94, and a fluid transfer layer 78. placed between the absorbent body 40 and the material facing the body 28. The layer of projections 94 may have an inner surface 102 and an outer surface 104 and may have a plurality of hollow projections 90 extending from the outer surface 104 of the projection layer 94. In such an embodiment, the body facing material 28 may have a contact area 116 that may have more than about 10% open area within an area selected from the body facing material 28 and the projections 90 have less than about 1% open area within a selected area of the body facing material 28. In various embodiments, the body facing material 28 of the absorbent article 10 can also include a plurality of fibers of the projection layer 94 entangled with the support layer 92, a load of more than about 2 Newton per 25 mm width to 10% extension in the machine direction, the projections 90 which have a height greater than about 1 mm, a resilience of more than about 70%, and combinations thereof. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may be free of superabsorbent material. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may have more than about 15% superabsorbent material. In several embodiments, the open area of the projections 90 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers. In various embodiments, the open area of the contact areas 116 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers. In various embodiments, the amount of residual fecal material simulant remaining in the body facing material 28 after an assault with fecal material simulant according to the test method described herein is less than about 2.5 grams. .

In one embodiment, an absorbent article 10 may have an outer covering 26, an absorbent body 40, a material facing the body 28, an acquisition layer 84 positioned between the absorbent body 40 and the material facing the body 28, and a fluid transfer layer 78 positioned between the acquisition layer 84 and the absorbent body 40. In such an embodiment, the fluid transfer layer 78 may include a polymeric material. In such an embodiment, the body-facing material 28 may have a support layer 92 and a projection layer 94. In such an embodiment, the projection layer 94 may have an interior surface 102 and an exterior surface 104 and may have a plurality. of hollow projections 90 extending from the outer surface 104 of the projection layer 94. In various embodiments, the acquisition layer 84 may have fibers with a denier of more than about 5. In various embodiments, the material oriented to the body 28 of the absorbent article 10 may further include a contact area 116 with more than about 1% open area within a selected area of the material facing the body 28, the projections 90 having less than about 1% open area within a selected area of the material facing the body 28, a plurality of fibers of the projection layer 94 entangled with the support layer 92, a load of more than about 2 Newton per 25 mm width to 10% extension in the machine direction, the projections 90 having a height greater than about 1 mm, a resilience of more than about 70%, and combinations of they. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may be free of superabsorbent material. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may have more than about 15% superabsorbent material. In several embodiments, the open area of the projections 90 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers. In various embodiments, the open area of the contact areas 116 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers. In various embodiments, the fecal material simulant propagation area in the body facing material 28 after an assault with fecal material simulant according to the test method described herein may be less than about 34 cm2 .

In one embodiment, an absorbent article 10 may have an outer covering 26, an absorbent body 40, a body facing material 28 with a contact area 116 that has more than about 5% open area within a selected area of the material directed towards the body 28, an acquisition layer 84 positioned between the absorbent body 40 and the material facing the body 28, and a fluid transfer layer 78 positioned between the acquisition layer 84 and the absorbent body 40. In this embodiment, the fluid transfer layer 78 may contain a cellulosic material. In such an embodiment, the body-facing material 28 may have a support layer 92 and a projection layer 94. In such an embodiment, the projection layer 94 may have an interior surface 102 and an exterior surface 104 and may have a plurality. of hollow projections 90 extending from the outer surface 104 of the projection layer 94 wherein the projections have less than about 1% open area within a selected area of the material facing the body. In various embodiments, the acquisition layer 84 can have fibers with a denier of more than about 5. In various embodiments, the acquisition layer 84 can have fibers with a denier of less than about 5. In various embodiments, the material oriented toward the body 28 of the absorbent article 10 may further include a plurality of fibers of the projection layer 94 entangled with the support layer 92, a load of more than about 2 Newton per 25 mm width at 10% extension in the machine direction, projections 90 having a height greater than about 1 mm, a resilience of more than about 70%, and combinations thereof. In several embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may be free of superabsorbent material. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may have more than about 15% superabsorbent material. In several embodiments, the open area of the projections 90 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers. In various embodiments, the open area of the contact area 116 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers. In various embodiments, the fecal material simulant propagation area in the body facing material 28 after an assault with fecal material simulant according to the test method described herein may be less than about 34 cm2 .

In one embodiment, an absorbent article 10 may have an outer covering 26, an absorbent body 40, a material facing the body 28, an acquisition layer 84 positioned between the absorbent body 40 and the material facing the body 28, and a fluid transfer layer 78 positioned between the acquisition layer 84 and the absorbent body 40. In this embodiment, the fluid transfer layer 78 may contain a cellulosic material. In such an embodiment, the body-facing material 28 may have a support layer 92 and a projection layer 94. In such an embodiment, the projection layer 94 may have an interior surface 102 and an interior surface. outer surface 104 and may have a plurality of hollow projections 90 extending from the outer surface 104 of the projection layer 94. In various embodiments, the acquisition layer 84 may have fibers with a denier of more than about 5. In several embodiments, the acquisition layer 84 may have fibers with a denier of less than about 5. In various embodiments, the body-facing material 28 of the absorbent article 10 may further include a plurality of fibers of the entangled projection layer 94. with the support layer 92, a load of more than about 2 Newton per 25 mm width to 10% extension in the machine direction, the projections 90 having a height greater than about 1 mm, the projections have less than about 1% open area within a selected area of the material facing the body 28, a resilience of more than about 70%, and combinations of them. In various embodiments, the body-oriented material 28 may have a contact area 116 and the contact area 116 may have an open area greater than about 1% within a selected area of the material facing the body 28. In various embodiments , the absorbent body 40 may be free of superabsorbent material. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may have more than about 15% material superabsorbent In several embodiments, the open area of the projections 90 is due to the interstitial separation between fibers. In several embodiments, the open area of the contact areas 116 is due to the interstitial separation between fibers. In various embodiments, the fecal material simulant propagation area in the body facing material 28 after an assault with fecal material simulant according to the test method described herein may be less than about 34 cm2 .

In one embodiment, an absorbent article 10 may have an outer covering 26, an absorbent body 40, and a material facing the body 28. In such an embodiment, the material facing the body 28 may have a support layer 92 and a layer of projections 94. In such an embodiment, the layer of projections 94 may have an inner surface 102 and an outer surface 104 and may have a plurality of hollow projections 90 extending from the outer surface 104 of the projection layer 94. In such a case embodiment, the absorbent article 10 may have a second admission time of the simulated menstruation through the body-oriented material 28 of less than about 30 seconds after an assault with the simulated menstruation according to the Admission / Test method. Rewetting that is described in the present. In various modalities, the body-oriented material 28 may further include a contact area 116 with more than about 1% open area within a selected area of the material facing the body 28, the projections 90 with less than about 1 % of open area within a selected area of the material facing the body 28, a plurality of fibers of the projection layer 94 entangled with the support layer 92, a load of more than about 2 Newton per 25 mm width to 10 % extension in the machine direction, projections 90 having a height greater than about 1 mm, a resilience of more than about 70% and combinations thereof. In various embodiments, the absorbent article 10 may further include a secondary liner 34 positioned between the material facing the body 28 and the absorbent body 40. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may be free of superabsorbent material. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may have more than about 15% superabsorbent material. In various embodiments, the open area of the contact area 116 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers.

In one embodiment, an absorbent article 10 may have an outer covering 26, an absorbent body 40, a material facing the body 28, and a coating secondary layer 34 positioned between the body facing material 28 and the absorbent body 40. In such an embodiment, the body facing material 28 may have a support layer 92 and a layer of projections 94. In such an embodiment, the layer of projections 94 may have an inner surface 102 and an outer surface 104 and may have a plurality of hollow projections 90 that extend from the outer surface 104 of the projection layer 94. In such an embodiment, the absorbent article 10 may have a second time admission of the simulated menstruation through the body-oriented material 28 of less than about 30 seconds after an assault with the simulated menstruation according to the Admission / Rewet test method described herein. In various embodiments, the body-oriented material 28 may further include a contact area 116 with more than about 1% open area within a selected area of the material facing the body 28, the projections 90 with less than about 1% of open area within a selected area of the material facing the body 28, a plurality of fibers of the projection layer 94 entangled with the support layer 92, a load of more than about 2 Newton per 25 mm width at 10% extension in the direction of the machine, 90 projections that have a height greater than about 1 mm, a resilience of more than about 70% and combinations thereof. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may be free of superabsorbent material. In various embodiments, the absorbent body 40 may have more than about 15% superabsorbent material. In various embodiments, the open area of the contact area 116 may be due to the interstitial separation between fibers.

Method to determine the percent of open area The percentage of open area can be determined by using the image analysis measurement method described herein. In this context, the open area is considered regions within a material where light transmitted from a light source passes directly through those regions without obstacles in the material of interest. Generally, the image analysis method determines a numerical value of the percentage of open area for a material through specific measurement parameters of image analysis such as the area. The open area percentage method is performed by using conventional optical image analysis techniques to detect regions of open area in both the contact areas as the projections separately and then calculate their percentages in each. To separate contact areas and projections for detection and measurement Subsequently, incident lighting is used in conjunction with the image processing steps. An image analysis system, controlled by an algorithm, performs the detection, processing and measurement of images and also transmits data digitally to a spreadsheet database. The resulting measurement data is used to determine the percentage of open area of materials that have contact areas and projections.

The method for determining the percentage of open area in both the contact areas and in the projections of a given material includes the step of acquiring two separate digital images of the material. An illustrative configuration for image acquisition is illustrated representatively in Figure 30. Specifically, a CCD 200 video camera (for example, a 310 FX Leica DFC video camera operated in gray scale mode and available from Leica Microsystems of Heerbrugg, Switzerland) is mounted on a standard support 202 such as a standard Polaroid MP-4 Land Camera stand or equivalent available from the Polaroid Resource Center in Cambridge, MS. Standard support 202 is attached to a general viewer 204 such as a KREONITE general viewer available from Dunning Photo Equipment, Inc., which has an office in Bixby, Oklahoma. An automatic platform 208 is placed on the upper surface 206 of the general viewer 204. The automatic platform 208 is used for automatically move the position of a given material to be observed by the camera 200. A suitable automatic platform is the H112 model, available from Prior Scientific Inc., which has an office in Rockland, Massachusetts.

The material having contact areas and pctions is placed on the automatic platform 208 under the optical axis of a 60 mm Nikon AF Nikkor Micro 210 lens with a setting of the number f of 4. The Nikon 210 lens joins the Leica camera DFC 310 FX 200 using a mount adapter C. The distance DI from the front face 212 of the Nikon 210 lens to the material is 21 cm. The material is placed flat on the automatic platform 208 and any wrinkle is removed by gentle stretching and / or fastening it to the surface of the automatic platform 208 by the use of transparent adhesive tape on its outer edges. The material is oriented so that the machine direction (MD) runs in the horizontal direction of the resulting image. The surface of the material is illuminated with incident fluorescent light which provides a 40-watt 16-inch 16-inch GE Circline fluorescent lamp, 214. The lamp 214 is contained in an accessory that is positioned so that it is centered on the material and underneath it. the video camera cited above and is at a distance D2 of 3 inches above the surface of the material. The level of illumination of the lamp 214 is controlled by an autotransformer variable, type 3PN1010, available from Staco Energy Products Co. which has an office in Dayton, Ohio. The transmitted light is also provided to the material from below the automatic platform 208 by a bank of five 20-watt fluorescent lights 218 covered with a diffuser plate 220. The diffuser plate 220 is inserted, and forms a portion of, the upper surface 206 of the general viewer 204. The diffuser plate 220 is overlaid with a black mask 222 having an aperture 224 of 3 inches by 3 inches. The opening 224 is positioned so that it is centered under the optical axis of the Leica camera and the lens system. The distance D3 from the opening 224 to the surface of the automatic platform 208 is approximately 17 cm. The level of illumination of the fluorescent light bank 218 is also controlled with an independent variable autotransformer.

The image analysis software platform used to perform open area percentage measurements is QWIN Pro (Version 3.5.1) available from Leica Microsystems, which has an office in Heerbrugg, Switzerland. The system and images are also calibrated by using the QWIN software and a standard ruler with metric markings at least as small as one millimeter. The calibration is performed in the horizontal dimension of the video camera image. Calibration units are used for calibration millimeters per pixel.

The method for determining the percentage of open area of a given material includes the step of making several zone measurements from both incident light and transmitted light images. Specifically, an image analysis algorithm is used to acquire and process images, as well as perform measurements using the Quantimet Interactive User Programming System (QUIPS) language. The image analysis algorithm is reproduced below.

NAME =% of Open Area - Regions of Contact vs Regions of Pction-1 PURPOSE = Measure% of Open Area in the 'contact' and 'pction' regions through the 'sandwich' lighting technique DEFINE VARIABLES AND OPEN FILES Open File (C: \ Data \ 3929l \% open area \ data.xls, channel # 1) MFLDIMAGE = 2 TOTCOUNT = 0 TOTCAMPOS = 0 ID OF THE SAMPLE AND CONFIGURATION Configure (Image storage 1392 x 1040, Images in Gray 81, Binary 24) Enter caption of results Archive result heading (channel # 1) Archive line (channel # 1) TWAIN DC image setting [PAUSE] (Camera 1, Auto exposure Off, Gain 0.00, Exposure Time 34.23 ms, Brightness 0, Lamp 38.83) Measuring frame (x 31, and 61, Width 1330, Height 978) Image frame (x 0, y 0, width 1392, height 1040) - Valorcal = 0. 0231 mm / px VALORCAL = 0.0231 Calibrate (VALORCAL UNIDADESCAL $ per pixel) Clear Accept For (SAMPLE = 1 to 1, step 1) Clear Accept Archive ("Field No.", channel # 1, width of the field: 9, justified to the left) Archive ("Contact area", channel # 1, field width: 9, justified to the left) Archive ("Contact area open", channel # 1, width of field: 13, justified to the left) Archive ("% open contact area", channel # 1, field width: 15, justified to the left) Archive ("Proy area", channel # 1, width of the field: 9, justified to the left) Archive ("Proy. Open Proy. Area", channel # 1, width of the field: 13, justified to the left) Archive ("% open project area", channel # 1, field width: 15, justified to the left) Archive ("Total Open Area%", channel # 1, field width: 14, justified to the left) Archive line (channel # 1) Platform (Define Origin) Platform (Scan Pattern, 5 x 1 fields, size 82500.000000 x 82500.000000) PURCHASE OF IMAGE I - Isolation of projections For (FIELD = 1 to 5, step 1) Display (ImageO (On), racks (on, on)), plans (off, off, off, off, off, off), lut 0, x 0, and 0, z 1, Reduction off) PauseText ("Ensure that the incident illumination is correct (WL = 0.88 - 0.94) and acquire the image . ") TWAIN DC image setting [PAUSE] (Camera 1, Auto exposure Off, Gain 0.00, Exposure Time 34.23 ms, Brightness 0, Lamp 38.83) Acquire (in ImageO) DETECT - Solo Projections PauseText (Ensure that threshold is set at least to the right of the peak of the left gray level histogram that corresponds to the "contact" region.) Detect [PAUSE] (whiter than 127, of the ImageO in the outlined BinaryO) PROCESSING OF BINARY IMAGE Amend Binary (Close from BinaryO to Binariol, cycles 10, Disk operator, erode edges on) Identify Binary (Fill Binariol Holes to Binariol) Amend Binary (Open from Binariol to Binary2, cycles 20, Disk operator, erode edges on) Amend Binary (Close Binary2 to Binary3, cycles 8, Disk operator, erode edges on) Pause Text ("Press the <control> &<b> keys to check the detection of the package and correct it if it is necessary. ") Edit Binary [PAUSE] (Draw from Binary3 to Binary3, tip Filling, width 2) Logical Binary (copy Binary3, inverted to Binary4) ACQUISITION OF IMAGE 2 -% of Open Area Display (ImageO (On), racks (on, on)), plans (off, off, off, off, off, off), lut 0, x 0, and 0, z 1, Reduction off) PauseText ("Turn off the incident light and ensure that the transmitted light is correct (L = 0. 97) and acquire image. ") TWAIN DC image setting [PAUSE] (Camera 1, Auto exposure Off, Gain 0.00, Exposure Time 34.23 ms, Brightness 0, Lamp 38.83) Acquire (in ImageO) DETECT - Only open zones Detect (more white than 210, of the ImageO in the delimited BinariolO) PROCESSING OF BINARY IMAGE Logical Binary (C = A and B: C Binarioll, A Binario3, B BinariolO) Logical Binary (C = A and B: C Binariol2, A Binario4, B BinariolO) MEASURE ZONES - Contact, projections, open areas within each -- Contact area MFLDIMAGE = 4 Measure field (flat MFLDIMAGE, in FLDRESULTS (1), statistics in FLDSTATS (7,1)) Selected parameters: Area ÁACACONTACTO = FLDRESULTS (1) - Screening area MFLDIMAGE = 3 Measure field (flat MFLDIMAGE, in FLDRESULTS (1) statistics in FLDSTATS (7,1)) Selected parameters: Area ÁREABULTOS = FLDRESULTS (1) - Area of open projections MFLDIMAGE = 11 Measure field (flat MFLDIMAGE, in FLDRESULTS (1) statistics in FLDSTATS (7,1)) Selected parameters: Area ÁREABULTOSAP = FLDRESULTS (1) - Open contact area MFLDIMAGE = 12 Measure field (flat MFLDIMAGE, in FLDRESULTS (1) statistics in FLDSTATS (7,1)) Selected parameters: Area ÁREACONTACTOAP = FLDRESULTS (1) -% Total open area MFLDIMAGE = 10 Measure field (flat MFLDIMAGE, in FLDRESULTS (1) statistics in FLDSTATS (7,1)) Selected parameters: Area% ÁREAAPPORCTOT = FLDRESULTS (1) CALCULATE AND GIVE OUT OF ZONES CACONTACTOAPPORC = ÁREACONTACTOAP / ÁREACONTACTO * 100 ÁREABULTOSAPPORC = ÁREABULTOSAP / ÁREABULTOS * 100 Archive (FIELD, channel # 1, 0 digits after Archive (AREAACONTACT, channel # 1, 2 digits after Archive (ÁREACONTACTOAP, channel # 1, 2 digits after '.') Archive (APACONTACTOAPPORC, channel # 1, 1 digit after '.') Archive (AREA, channel # 1, 2 digits after Archive (ÁREABULTOSAP, channel # 1, 4 digits after Archive (AFFILIATES, channel # 1, 5 digits after '.1) Archive (ÁREAAPPORCTOT, channel # 1, 2 digits after '·') Archive line (channel # 1) Platform (Step, Wait until it stops + 1100 ms) Next (FIELD) Pause Text ("If there are no more samples, enter '0.'") Input (FINAL) Yes (FINAL = 0) Go OUT End yes PauseText ("Place the next duplicate specimen on the automatic platform, turn on the incident light and turn off and / or block the illumination of the sub-platform. ") TWAIN DC image setting [PAUSE] (Camera 1, Auto exposure Off, Gain 0.00, Exposure Time 34.23 ms, Brightness 0, Lamp 38.83) File line (channel # 1) Next (SAMPLE) DEPARTURE: Close File (channel # 1) END The QUIPS algorithm is executed through the use of the QWIN Pro software platform. The analyst is initially asked to enter the information from the set of materials that is sent to the Excel file.

Then the analyst is asked through a configuration window with a live image on the computer monitor screen, to place a material on the automatic platform 208. The material should be laid flat and apply a gentle force on its edges to eliminate any visible wrinkles that may be present. It must also be aligned so that the direction of the machine runs horizontally in the image. At this time, the Circline 214 fluorescent lamp can be turned on to assist in the placement of the material. Next, it ask the analyst to adjust the Circline 214 incident fluorescent lamp through the variable autotransformer to a target level reading of approximately 0.9. The transmitted light bank of the sub-platform 218 must either be turned off at this time or masked by the use of a light blocking piece, black card that is placed over the aperture 224 of 3 inches by 3 inches.

The analyst is now requested to ensure that the detection threshold is set at the appropriate level for the detection of the projections by using the Detection Window that is displayed on the computer's monitor screen. Typically, the threshold is adjusted by using the white mode at a point approximately near the middle of the 8-bit gray level range (for example 127). If necessary, the threshold level can be adjusted up or down so that the resulting detected binary will optimally encompass the projections shown in the acquired image with respect to its boundaries with the surrounding contact region.

After the algorithm automatically performs several stages of binary image processing in the detected binary of the projections, the analyst will be given the opportunity to re-check the detection of projections and correct any inaccuracy. The analyst can press the 'control' and 'b' keys at the same time to re-check the projection detection against the underlying grayscale image acquired. If necessary, the analyst can select from a set of binary editing tools (for example, draw, reject, etc.) to make minor adjustments. If care is taken to ensure adequate illumination and detection in the stages described above, no correction should be needed at this time or very little.

Next, the analyst is requested to turn off the incident Circline fluorescent lamp 214 and either activate the transmitted light bank of the sub-platform or remove the light blocking mask. The transmitted light bank of the sub-platform is adjusted by the variable autotransformer to a target level reading of approximately 0.97. At this point, the focus of the image can be optimized for the contact areas of the material.

The algorithm, after performing additional operations on the resulting separate binary images for the projections, the contact areas and the open area, will then automatically perform the measurements and output the data in a designated EXCEL spreadsheet file. The following data of the measurement parameters can be found in the EXCEL file after the measurements and the transfer of the data : Contact area Open contact area Open Contact Area% Screening area Open area of projections % of projections open area Total Open Area% After the data transfer, the algorithm will direct the automatic platform 208 to move on to the next field of view and the process of activating the incident Circline fluorescent lamp, 214 and the blocking of the transmitted light bank of the subplate 218 will start again. This process is repeated four times so that there will be five data sets of five field of view images separated by duplicate individual material.

Multiple sampling duplicates of an individual material can be carried out during a single execution of the QUIPS algorithm (Note: The To - Next Sample line in the algorithm must be adjusted to reflect the number of duplicate analyzes of material to be made per material). The average propagation value of the final material is usually based on an analysis of N = 5 of five duplicates of separated material subsamples. A comparison between the different materials can be made by using a Student's T-test at the 90% confidence level.

Method to determine the height of the projections The height of the projections can be determined by the use of the image analysis measurement method described herein. The image analysis method determines a dimensional numerical height value for the projections by using specific image analysis measurements of both the contact areas and the projections with the underlying contact regions in a sample and then by calculation of the height of the projections only by difference between the two. The height method of the projections is made by using conventional optical image analysis techniques to detect cross-sectional regions of both the contact areas and the projection structures and then measure a linear average height value for each when observed with a camera with incident lighting. The resulting measurement data is used to compare the projection height characteristics of different types of admission layers facing the body.

Before making the measurements of image analysis, the sample of interest must be prepared in such a way as to allow the visualization of a representative cross section that passes through the center of a projection. The transverse sectioning can be performed by anchoring a representative piece of the sample on at least one of its straight edges running across the machine on a flat, smooth surface with a strip of tape such as the SCOTCH® Magic ™ de inch tape produced by 3M . The transverse sectioning is then performed by using a blue blade of single-edged carbon steel blade without previously using (PAL) and carefully cutting it in a far direction and orthogonal to the anchored edge and through the centers of at least one projection and preferably more, if the projections are arranged in rows that run in the direction of the machine. Any remaining rows of projections placed behind the cross-sectional side of the projections must be cut and removed before mounting so that only the cross-sectional projections of interest are present. Such blades for transverse sectioning can be purchased from Electron Microscopy Sciences of Hatfield, Pennsylvania (Cat. # 71974). The transverse sectioning is done in the direction of the sample machine, and a new blade, without previously using it, must be used for each new cross section. The cross-section face can now be mounted so that the projections are directed upwardly away from the base support by the use of an adherent such as a two-sided tape so that it can be observed by the use of a video camera that has an optical lens. The base itself and any background behind the sample that will be within reach of the camera should be darkened by the use of a black non-reflective tape and black card 317 (shown in Figure 31), respectively. For a typical sample, enough cross sections must be cut and mounted separately from which a total of six projection height values can be determined.

In Figure 31, an illustrative configuration for image acquisition is illustrated representatively. Specifically, a CCD 300 video camera (e.g., a Leica DFC 310 FX video camera operating in gray scale mode available from Leica Microsystems of Heerbrugg, Switzerland) is mounted on a standard 302 support such as a standard support for Polaroid MP-4 Land Camera available from Polaroid Resource Center in Cambridge, MS or equivalent. Standard support 302 is attached to a general viewer 304 such as a KREONITE general viewer available from Dunning Photo Equipment, Inc., which has an office in Bixby, Oklahoma. An automatic platform 306 is placed on the upper surface of the general viewer 304. The automatic platform 306 is used to move the position of a given sample to be observed by the camera 300. A suitable automatic platform 306 is an H112 model, available from Prior Scientific Inc., which has an office in Rockland, Massachusetts.

The support of the darkened sample 308 which exposes the face of the sample in cross section having contact areas and projections is placed on the automatic platform 306 under the optical axis of a Nikon 310 lens 50 with an adjustment of the number f of 2.8. The Nikon 310 lens is attached to the Leica DFC 310 FX 300 camera by using a 30mm 312 telescopic tube and a C-mount adapter. The sample assembly 308 is oriented so that the cross section of the sample is flush towards the camera 300 and run in the horizontal direction of the resulting image with the projections directed upwards away from the base support. The face of the cross section is illuminated with incident incandescent lighting, 316 which provide two GE Reflector Flood lamps, 150 watts. The two projection lamps are positioned so as to provide more illumination to the face of the cross section than to the assembly of the sample 308 below it in the image. When viewed from above directly above the camera 300 and the cross section of the assembly of the underlying sample 308, the led lamps 316 will be positioned at approximately 30 degrees and 150 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane passing through the camera 300 From this point of view the camera support will be in the 90 degree position. The lighting level of the lamps is controlled with a Variable Autotransformer, type 3PN1010, available from Staco Energy Products Co. which has an office in Dayton, Ohio.

The image analysis software platform used for measurements is QWIN Pro (Version 3.5.1) available from Leica Microsystems, which has an office in Heerbrugg, Switzerland. The system and images are also calibrated by using the QWIN software and a standard ruler with metric markings at least as small as one millimeter. The calibration is performed in the horizontal dimension of the video camera image. Units of millimeters per pixel are used for the calibration.

Therefore, the method for determining the projection heights of a given sample includes the step of making several dimensional measurements. Specifically, an image analysis algorithm is used to acquire and process images, as well as perform measurements using the Quantimet Interactive User Programming System (QUIPS) language. The image analysis algorithm is reproduced below.

NAME = Height - Projection Regions vs. Contact Regions - 1 PURPOSE = Measures the height of the projection and contact regions DEFINE VARIABLES AND OPEN FILES - The following line is established to designate where the measurement data will be stored.

Open file (C: \ Data \ 3929l \ Height \ data.xls, channel #1) FIELDS = 6 ID OF THE SAMPLE AND CONFIGURATION Enter caption of results Archive result heading (channel # 1) Archive line (channel # 1) Measurement frame (x 31, and 61, width 1330, height 978) Image frame (x 0, y 0, width 1392, height 1040) - Valorcal = 0.0083 mm / pixel VALORCAL = 0.0083 Calibrate (VALORCAL UNIDADESCAL $ per pixel) For (DUPLICATE = 1 to FIELDS, step 1) Clean Characteristics Histogram # 1 Clean Characteristics Histogram # 2 Clear Accept ACQUISITION OF IMAGE AND DETECTION PauseText ("Position image, focus image and set the target level to 0.95.") TWAIN DC image setting [PAUSE] (Camera 1, Auto exposure Off, Gain 0.00, Exposure Time 200.00 ms, Brightness 0, Lamp 49.99) Acquire (in ImageO) ACQSALIDA = 0 - The following line can be configured optionally to save image files to a specific location.

ACQFILE $ = "C: \ Images \ 39291 - for Height \ Text. 2H _ "+ STR $ (DUPLICADO) +" s.jpg " Write Image (of ACQOUTPUT in File ACQFILE $) Detects (more white than 104, of the ImageO in the BinaryO outlined) IMAGE PROCESSING Amend Binary (Close from BinaryO to Binariol, cycles 4, Disk operator, erode edges on) Amend Binary (Open from Binariol to Binary2, cycles 4, Disk operator, erode edges on) Identify Binary (Fill Binary holes2 to Binary3) Amend Binary (Close Binary3 to Binary4, cycles 15, Disk operator, erode edges on) Amend Binary (Open from Binary4 to Binary5, cycles 20, Disk operator, erode edges on) PauseText ("Fill in the regions of projections and contact to be included, and reject on the detected regions. ") Edit Binary [PAUSE] (Draw from Binary5 to Binary6, Tip Fill, Width 2) PauseText ("Select the regions of 'contact' to measure.") Edit Binary [PAUSE] (Accept from Binary6 to Binary7, tip Filling, width 2) PauseText ("Select region of 'projections' to measure.") Edit Binary [PAUSE] (Accept from Binary6 to Binary8, tip Filling, width 2) - Combine the projection and contact regions with the measuring grid.

Graphics (Grid, 30 x 0 Lines, Grid Size 1334 x 964, Origin 21 x 21, Thickness 2, Orientation 0.000000, to Binariol5 Clean) Logical Binary (C = A and B: C BinariolO, A Binario7, B Binariol5) Logical Binary (C = A and B: C Binarioll, A Binary8, B Binariol5) MEASURE HEIGHTS - Only contact regions Measure characteristics (BinariolO plane, 8 Ferets, minimum zone: 8, gray image: ImageO) Selected parameters: X FCP, Y FCP, Feret90 Characteristic Histogram # 1 (and Parameter Number, X Parameter Feret90, 0.0100 to 5.) logarithm, 20 bins) Visualize Characteristic Histogram Results (# 1, horizontal, differential, bins + graph (Y axis linear), statistics) Data window (1278, 412, 323, 371) Only projection regions (includes any underlying contact material) Measure characteristics (Binarioll plane, 8 Ferets, minimum zone: 8, gray image: ImageO) Selected parameters: X FCP, Y FCP, Feret90 Characteristic Histogram # 2 (and Parameter Number, X Parameter Feret90, 0.0100 to 10.) logarithm, 20 bins) Display Characteristic Histogram Results (# 2, horizontal, differential, bins + graph (Y axis linear), statistics) Data window (1305, 801, 297, 371) DEPARTURE DATA Archive ("Contact height (mm)", channel # 1) Archive line (channel # 1) Archive Characteristic Histogram Results (# 1, differential, statistics, bins details, channel # 1) File line (channel # 1) Archive line (channel # 1) Archive ("Projection Height + Contact (mm)", channel # 1) Archive line (channel # 1) Archive Characteristic Histogram Results (# 2, differential, statistics, bins details, channel # 1) File line (channel # 1) Archive line (channel # 1) Archive line (channel # 1) Next (DUPLICATE) Close File (channel # 1) END The QUIPS algorithm is executed through the use of the software platform QWIN Pro. The analyst is initially asked to enter the identification information of the sample that is sent to an designated EXCEL file, to which the measurement data will also be sent later.

The analyst is then asked to place the cross section of the sample mounted on the automatic platform 306 which has the background obscured so that the face of the cross section is flush with the camera 300 with the projections directed upwards and the length runs horizontally on the live image that appears on the video monitor screen. The analyst then adjusts the video camera 300 and the vertical position of the lens 310 to optimize the focus of the face of the cross section. The level of illumination is also adjusted by the analyst through the Variable Autotransformer to a White level reading of approximately 0.95.

Once the analyst completes the previous steps and executes the continue command, an image will be acquired, detected and processed automatically by the QUIPS algorithm. The analyst will then be asked to fill in the detected binary image, using the computer mouse, of any projection and / or contact areas that are shown in the cross section image that should have been included by the detection and processing stages. previous images, as well as rejecting any over the detected regions that go beyond the limits of the structure of the cross section that is shown in the underlying grayscale image. To assist in this editing process, the analyst can press the "control" and "B" keys on the keyboard at the same time to activate and deactivate the superimposed binary image to evaluate to what extent the binary matches the limits of the sample that They are shown in the cross section. If the initial preparation of the cross-sectional sampling was done well, little or no manual editing should be required.

Now the analyst is asked to "Select the contact region for the measurement" by using the computer mouse. This selection is made by carefully figuring out a vertical line down through on one side of a single contact area located between or adjacent to the projections and then, with the left mouse button still pressed, move the cursor below the contact area to its opposite side and then draw another vertical line upwards. Once this happens, the left mouse button can be released and the contact area to be measured should be filled with a green color. If the vertical edges of the selected selected region are distorted in some way, the analyst can reset the original detected binary by clicking on the "Undo" button, which is located inside the binary editing window and begin the process of selecting new until the straight vertical edges are obtained on both sides of the selected contact region.

In the same way, the analyst will then be asked to "Select the region of 'projections' for the measurement." The upper part of a projection region adjacent to the contact area selected above is now selected in the same manner as described above for the selection of a contact area.

The algorithm will then automatically perform the measurements in both selected regions and output the data, in histogram format, in the designated EXCEL spreadsheet file. In the Excel file, the histograms for the contact and projection regions they will be labeled "Contact height (mm)" and "Projection height + contact (mm)", respectively. A separate set of histograms will be generated for each selection of contact region and projection pairs.

Then, the analyst will be asked again to place the sample and begin the process of selecting the different contact and projection regions. At this point, the analyst can use the automatic platform control lever to move the same cross section to a new subsampling position or he can place on the automatic platform 306 for measurement a completely different mounted cross section obtained from the same sample. The process to place the sample and the selection of the contact and projection regions for the measurement will occur six times for each execution of the QUIPS algorithm.

By calculating the numerical difference between the average values of the separated histograms of the contact and projection regions for each pair of individual measurements, a single height value of the projections is then determined. The QUIPS algorithm will provide six sets of repeated measurements of the two contact and projection regions for an individual sample so that the six projection height values will be generated per sample. The dispersion value The average of the final sample is generally based on an N = 6 analysis of six separate subsample measurements. By using Student's T-test at the 90% confidence level, a comparison between the different samples can be made.

Examples: Example 1: To demonstrate the process, apparatus and materials of the current description, a series of body-oriented materials entangled by fluids 28 were prepared, as well as layers of projections 94 without support layers 92. The samples were made in a production line of hydroligating at Textor Technologies PTY LTD in Tullamarine, Australia, in a manner similar to that shown in Figure 25 of the figures with the exception that only one fluid entanglement device of projections 158c was employed for the formation of the projections 90 in the texturing zone 178. In addition, the projection layer 94 was previously wetted upstream of the process shown in Figure 25 and before the entanglement entangled device 158a by the use of conventional equipment . In this case, the previous wetting is achieved through the use of a single injector fixed at a pressure of 8 bar. The entanglement fluid entangled device 158a was set at 45 bar, the device entangled by Lamination fluid 158b was set at 60 bar while the single pressure of the entanglement device was varied by projection fluid 158c as set forth below in Tables 1 and 2, at pressures of 140, 160 and 180 bar, depending on the particular sample that runs.

For the conveyor belt 152 in Figure 25, the pre-entangling fluid device 158a was fixed at a height of 10 mm above the conveyor belt 152. For the lamination forming surface 180 the entangling device by rolling fluid 158b was fixed at a height of 12 mm above the surface 180 as was the fluid entanglement device of projections 158c with respect to the surface forming projections 156.

The projection forming surface 156 was a 1.3 m wide steel texturizing drum with a diameter of 520 mm, a drum thickness of 3 mm and a hexagonal closed packing pattern of 4 mm round forming holes 170 separated by 6 mm separation center to center. The inner porous sheet of the drum 174 was a mesh of 100 (100 wires per inch in both directions / 39 wires per centimeter in both directions) of woven stainless steel wire mesh. The space or separation between the exterior of the cover 174 and the inside of the drum 156 was 1.5 mm.

The process parameters that were varied were the entanglement fluid pressures mentioned above (140, 160 and 180 bar) and the degree of supercharging (0%, 11%, 25% and 43%) by using the supercharging ratio above mentioned OF = [(Vi / V3) -l] xl00 where VI is the input speed of the projection layer 94 and V3 is the exit velocity of the material facing the body 28.

All samples were run at a line exit or separation speed (V3) of approximately 25 meters per minute (m / min). Tables 1 and 2 report VI for the samples in this. V2 remained constant for all samples in Tables 1 and 2 at a speed equal to V3 or 25 meters per minute. The finished samples were sent through a drying line to remove excess water as usual in the hydroentanglement process. The samples were collected after drying and then marked with a code (see Tables 1 and 2) to correspond to the process conditions used.

In relation to the processed materials, as indicated below in Tables 1 and 2, some were made with a support layer 92 and others not, and when a support layer 92 was used, there were three variations including a web spun connection, a hydroligated web and a heat-treated through-air carded web (TABCW). The spunbond backing layer 92 was a 17 g / m 2 polypropylene knitted weft made of 1.8 denier polypropylene spunbond fibers which were subsequently knitted with a global bond area per unit area of 17.5% made by Kimberly-Clark Australia of Milsons Point, Australia. The spunbond material was supplied and fed into the roll process with a roll width of approximately 130 centimeters. The hydrolyzed backing layer 92 was a hydrolyzed material of 52 g / m2 by a uniform blend of 70 weight percent short fibers of 40 mm long viscose denier 1.5, and 30 weight percent short fibers 38 mm in polyester (PET) denier 1.4, manufactured by Textor Technologies PTY LTD of Tullamarine, Australia. The hydrolyzed material was preformed and supplied in roll form and had a roll width of approximately 140 centimeters. The support layer 92 TABCW had a basis weight of 40 g / m2 and comprised a uniform blend of 40 weight percent short fibers of 51 mm long PET 6 denier, and 60 weight percent short fibers of 51 mm long bicomponent polyethylene wrapper / denier polypropylene core 3.8, manufactured by Textor Technologies PTY LTD of Tullamarine, Australia. In the following data (see Tables 1 and 2) under the heading "support layer" the splicing layer was identified as "SB", the hydroligated layer was identified as "SL" and the TABCW layer was identified as "S". When the support layer 92 was not used, the term "None" appears. The base weights used in the examples should not be considered a limitation on the base weights that can be used since the base weights of the support layers 92 can be varied depending on the final applications.

In all cases the projection layer 94 was a carded short fiber web made of 100% short 38 mm long fibers of 1.2 denier polyester, available from Huvis Corporation of Daejeon, Korea. The carded web of the projection layer 94 was manufactured in line with the hydroentanglement process by Textor Technologies PTY LTD of Tullamarine, Australia, and had a width of approximately 140 centimeters. Base weights varied as indicated in Tables 1 and 2 and ranged from 28 g / m2 to 49.5 g / m2 although other base weights and ranges may be used depending on the final application. Projection layer 94 was identified as the "card frame" in the data below in Tables 1 and 2.

The thickness of the materials set forth in Tables 1 and 2 below, as well as in Figure 32 were measured by using a Mitutoyo thickness gauge model ID-C1025B with a foot pressure of 345 Pa (0.05 psi). The measurements were made at room temperature (approximately 20 degrees Celsius) and were reported in millimeters by using a round foot with a diameter of 76.2 mm (3 inches). The thicknesses for selecting samples (average of three samples) with and without support layers are shown in Figure 32 of the figures.

The tensile strength of the materials, which is defined as the maximum load reached during the test, was measured both in the machine direction (MD) and in the cross machine direction (CMD) by using a device Instron tensile test model 3343 running an Instron Series IX software module Rev.1.16 with a load cell +/- 1 kN. The initial separation distance of the clamp ("meter length") was set at 75 millimeters and the crosshead speed was set at 300 millimeters per minute. Samples of 50 mm width by 300 mm length were cut in the machine direction (MD) and each result of the tensile strength test reported was the average of two samples per code. The samples were evaluated at room temperature (approximately 20 degrees Celsius). The excess material was left to cover the ends and sides of the apparatus. The resistance and extensions of the cross machine direction (CMD) were also measured and in general the CMD resistances were approximately half to one fifth of the resistance of the MD and the extensions of the CMD in the load maximum were approximately two or three times greater than in the MD direction. (The CMD samples were cut with the long dimension that was taken in the CMD.) The MD resistances were recorded in Newton by 50 mm width of the material. (The results are shown in Tables 1 and 2) The MD extensions for the material at the maximum load were reported as the percentage of the initial meter length (initial separation of the clamp).

The extension measures were also made and reported in the MD at a load of 10 Newton (N). (See Tables 1 and 2 below and Figure 23) Tables 1 and 2 show the data based on the variation of the support layer used, the degree of supercharging used and the variations in the water pressure of the hydro jets water jets.

As an example of the consequences of the variation of the process parameters, the high supercharging requires sufficient pressure from the jets to drive the layer of projections 94 on the surface forming shafts 156 and to assume the excess material that is supercharged in the texturing zone 178. If sufficient jet energy is not available to overcome the resistance of the material to texturing then the material will fold and overlap itself and in the worst case can be rolled up before the area of texturing 178 what requires stopping the process. Although the experiments were carried out at a speed of line V3 of 25 m / min, this should not be considered as a limitation regarding the speed of the line since the equipment with similar materials was executed at line speeds ranging from 10 to 70 meters per minute and speeds outside this range may be used depending on the materials being run.

The following tables (Tables 1 and 2) summarize the materials, process parameters, and test results. For the samples shown in Table 1, the samples were made with and without support layers 92. Codes 1.1 to 3.6 use the aforementioned yarn-binding support layer 92. The codes from 4.1 to 5.7 did not have support layer 92. The pressures of the jets for each of the samples are indicated in Tables 1 and 2.

Table 1. Experimental parameters and test results, with support layer 92 and without support layer 92, codes 1 to 5.

* Note for codes 4.1 to 5.9"Laminate" was a single layer structure since there was no support layer 92 present.

For Table 2, samples from 6SL.1 to 6SL.6 were run on the same equipment under the same conditions as the samples in Table 1 with the aforementioned hydrolyzed support layer 92 while the 6S samples .1 to 6S.4 were run with support layer 92 of heat-treated carded air-jet weft mentioned above. The layers of projections 94 ("card frames") were made in the same manner as those used in Table 1.

Table 2. Experimental parameters and test results code 6, alternative support layers 92.

As can be seen in Tables 1 and 2, the key quality parameter of the fabric thickness depends predominantly on the amount of supercharging of the layer of projections 94 in the texturing zone 178. With respect to the data shown in Table 2 it can be observed that the high supercharging ratios resulted in an increase in thickness. In addition, in the same supercharging ratios, the higher fluid pressures resulted in higher values of thickness which in turn indicates an increase in the height of the projections 90. Table 2 shows the results of the test for samples made by the use of alternative support layers 92. The 6S code used a 40 g / m 2 heat-treated carded through-air weft and the 6SL code used a hydrolyzed 52 g / m 2 material. These materials performed well and had good stability and appearance compared to unsupported materials without support layers 92.

Figure 32 shows the thickness of the sample in millimeters relative to the percentage of supercharging of the layer of projections 94 for a material facing the body 28 (which is represented by a diamond) against two samples that do not have a supporting layer 92. (which are represented by a square and a triangle). All values reported were an average of three samples. As can be seen from the data in Figure 32, as the overfeed increased, the thickness of the sample also increased which shows the importance and advantage of using overfeeding.

Figure 33 is a graph representing the percentage of extension of the sample at a load of 10 Newtons relative to the amount of supercharging of the projection layer 94 for the materials of Table 1. As can be seen in the graph in the Figure 33, when I was not present the support layer 92, there was a drastic increase in the machine direction extensibility of the resulting sample as the percentage of supercharging of material in the texturing zone 178 increased. In contrast, the sample with the Spunbond support 92 experienced virtually no increase in its extension rate as the supercharging ratio increased. This in turn resulted in the projection layer 94 having projections 90 that are more stable during post processing and that are better able to retain their shape and height.

As can be seen from the data and graphs, a greater overfeeding and, therefore, a greater height of the projections also decreased the tensile strength in MD and increased the extension in MD to the maximum load. This was due to the fact that the increase in texturing provided more material (in the projections) that did not immediately contribute to the resistance to the extension and generation of the load and allowed a greater extension before the maximum load was reached.

A key benefit of the lamination of both a projection layer 94 and a support layer 92 as compared to a layer of single-layer projections 94 without a support layer 92 can be that the support layer 92 can reduce the excessive extent during the subsequent processing and Conversion that can extract the texture of the fabric and reduce the height of the projections. Without the support layer 92 integrated in the projection forming process, it was very difficult to form screens with projections that could be processed below without the forces and stresses of the process acting on the frames and negatively affecting the integrity of the projections, on all when low weight basis patterns were desired. Other media such as thermal bonding or adhesives or increased entanglement may be used to stabilize the material but tend to lead to a loss of softness of the fabric and an increase in rigidity, as well as increase cost. The body-oriented material entangled by fluid 28 and / or the fluid-entangled fluid transfer layer 78 can provide smoothness and stability simultaneously. The difference between the textured materials with and without support is clearly illustrated in the last column of Table 1 which, for comparison, shows the extension of the samples with a load of 10 N. The data is also shown in Figure 33. It can be seen that the sample supported by the spunbond support layer 92 extends only a small percent at an applied load of 10 Newtons (N) and the extension was almost independent of the supercharging. In contrast, the layer of unsupported projections 94 was extended up to 30% at a load of 10 Newtons and the extension to 10 N was strongly dependent on the supercharging used to texture the material. For unsupported frames, low extensions in 10 N can be achieved, but only by having low supercharging, which results in a low height of the projections, that is, small texturing of the weft.

Figure 34 shows an example of the loading curves depending on the extension obtained in the tensile test of the samples in the machine direction (MD), which is the direction in which loads are more likely to be experienced. higher during the rolling of the material and in the subsequent processing and conversion. The samples that are presented were all made by using a 43% supercharging and approximately the same zone density (45 g / m2). It can be seen that the sample containing the spunbond backing layer 92 had a much higher initial modulus, the beginning of the curve being steep compared to that of the single spill layer 94 without support per se. This steeper initial part of the curve for the sample was also recoverable since the sample was elastic to the point where the gradient begins to decrease. The unsupported sample has a very low modulus and a permanent deformation and the loss of texture occurs at a lower charge. Figure 34 shows the load-extension curves for both a tissue supported as no support. The relative slope of the initial part of the curve for the supported tissue / material facing the body is indicated. This means that the sample without support is relatively easy to stretch and a high extension is required to generate any tension in it in comparison with the supported sample. Stress is often required for stability in subsequent processing and conversion but the unsupported sample is more prone to undergo permanent deformation and loss of texture as a result of the high extent required to maintain tension.

Figures 35 and 36 show the set of curves for a wider range of conditions. It can be observed that the samples with a low level of texturization from low overfeeding were stiffer and stronger (despite being slightly lighter), but the absence of texture renders them useless in this context. All supported laminate samples had higher initial gradients compared to the samples without supports.

The level of improvement in the overall quality of the material facing the body 28 and / or the fluid transfer layer 78 compared to a layer of projections 94 without a support layer 92 can be observed by comparing the photos of the materials shown in Figures 37, 37A, 38 and 38A. Figures 37 and 37A are photos of the sample represented by Code 3-6 in Table 1. Figures 38 and 38A are photos of the sample represented by Code 5-3 in Table 1. These codes were selected since both had the highest amount of overfeeding (43% ), and the jet pressure (180 bar) by using base weights of the comparable projection layer 94 (38 g / m2 and 38.5 g / m2 respectively) and therefore the highest potential for good projection formation . As can be seen from the comparison of the two codes and accompanying pictures, the supported / laminated pattern formed much more robust and visually discernible projections and of uniform material than the same layer of projections without a support layer. It also had better properties as shown by the data in Table 1. As a result, the supported laminate is much more suitable for further processing and is used in products such as absorbent articles for personal care.

Figure 39 is a photo at the interface of a projection layer 94 with and without a support layer 92. As can be seen in this photo, the supported projection layer 94 has a much higher level of integrity. This is especially important when the material is to be used in final applications such as absorbent articles for personal care where it is necessary (often with the use of adhesives) to attach the layer of projections 94 to the underlying layers of the product. With the projection layer without support, the loss of adhesive through it is a much greater threat. Such loss can result in clogging of unwanted processing and adhesion equipment of layers thus causing excessive downtime with manufacturing equipment. In use, the unsupported projection layer 94 is more likely to allow the absorbed fluids contained in the absorbent article (such as blood, urine, feces and menstruation) to reflux or "rewet" the upper surface of the material resulting in a inferior product.

Another obvious advantage from the visual observation of the samples (not shown) was the coverage and the degree of flatness of the rear part of the first surface 96 on the outer side of the support layer 92 and therefore the material directed towards the body 28 and / or the fluid transfer layer 78 resulting from the shaping process when compared to the inner surface 102 of a layer of projections 94 running through the same apparatus 150 without a support layer 92. Without the support layer 92, the outer surface of the projection layer 94 opposite the projections 90 was non-uniform and relatively non-planar. In contrast, the same external surface of the material facing the body 28 and / or the fluid transfer layer 78 with the support layer 92 was softer and much flatter. Providing such flat surfaces improves the ability to adhere the material facing the body 28 and / or the skin layer. transfer of fluids 78 to other materials in the subsequent conversion. As indicated in the illustrative product modalities described herein, when body-oriented materials 28 and / or fluid transfer layers 78 are used in accordance with the present disclosure in articles such as personal care absorbent articles, having flat surfaces that interact easily with adjacent layers is important in the art. context of joining the body-oriented material 28 and / or the fluid transfer layer 78 to other surfaces so as to allow rapid passage of the body exudates through the various layers of the absorbent article. If a good surface contact is not present a surface between the layers, the transfer of fluid between the adjacent layers can be compromised.

Examples 2 - 11 In Examples 2-11 that are described herein, the following table of material descriptions applies: Table 3: Descriptions of the materials oriented to the body entangled by double-layer fluid having 1) a 10 g / m2 polypropylene knitted, woven backing layer made of denier 1.8 polypropylene spunbond fibers which were subsequently knitted together with a area of union by unit of global area of 17.5% elaborated by Kimberly-Clark of Australia of Milsons Point, Australia and 2) a layer of projections of a carded plot of short fibers of 38 g / m2 elaborated of 100% of short fibers of 38 mm long 1.2 denier polyester available from Huvis Corporation of Daejeon, Korea. The projection layer has approximately 8.4% open area in the contact areas and has less than approximately 0.1% open area in the projections. The projection layer has a projection diameter of approximately 4 mm. The web was made wettable with up to about 0.3% of a 50:50 ratio of Ahcovel / SF-19 at the bottom of the backing layer and up to about 0.12% Ahcovel at the top of the backing layer. The weft has a thickness of 2.4 mm when measured under a pressure of 0.345 kPa. The plot has a total basis weight of 48 g / m2. The Plot is available from Textor Technologies PTY LTD of Tullamarine, Australia.

Body-oriented material: A body-oriented material entangled by double layer fluid that has 1) a 10 g / m2 polypropylene bonded weft support layer made of denier polypropylene 1.8 union yarns which subsequently were joined by point with a joint area per unit of global area of 17.5% made by Kimberly-Clark of Australia of Milsons Point, Australia and 2) a layer of projections of a carded weft of short fibers of 38 g / m2 made of 100% 38 mm long short fibers of 1.2 denier polyester available from Huvis Corporation of Daejeon, Korea. The projection layer has approximately 18.5% open area in the contact areas and has less than approximately 0.5% open area in the projections. The projection layer has a projection diameter of approximately 4 mm. The weft was made wettable with up to about 0.3% of a 50:50 ratio of Ahcovel / SF-19 at the bottom of the support layer and up to approximately 0.12% of Ahcovel in the part top of the projection layer. The weft has a thickness of 2.3 mm when measured under a pressure of 0.345 kPa. The weft has a total basis weight of 48 g / m2. The plot is available from Textor Technologies PTY LTD of Tullamarine, Australia.

Body-oriented material: A body-oriented material entangled by double layer fluid that has 1) a 10 g / m2 polypropylene bonded weft support layer made of denier polypropylene 1.8 union yarns which subsequently were joined by point with a joint area per unit of global area of 17.5% made by Kimberly-Clark of Australia of Milsons Point, Australia and 2) a layer of projections of a carded weft of short fibers of 38 g / m2 made of 100% 38 mm long short fibers of 1.2 denier polyester available from Huvis Corporation of Daejeon, Korea. The projection layer has approximately 20% open area in the contact areas and has less than about 1% open area in the projections. The projection layer has a projection diameter of approximately 4 mm.

The weft became wettable with up - wettable with up to about 0.3% of a 50:50 ratio of Ahcovel / SF-19 at the bottom of the support layer and up to about 0.12% Ahcovel at the top of the projection layer. The weft has a thickness of 2.5 mm when measured under a pressure of 0.345 kPa. The weft has a total basis weight of 48 g / m2. The plot is available from Textor Technologies PTY LTD of Tullamarine, Australia.

Fecal material simulator: The following is a description of the fecal material simulant that was used in some of the examples described herein.

Fecal material simulant ingredients: • Natural low-fat yogurt (1.5% dairy fat grade A) Dannon®, vanilla flavored with other natural flavors in a 32 oz. Container.

• McCormick ground turmeric • 100 ¾ of Great Value® liquid egg whites • Knox® Original Gelatin-tasteless and powdered • DAWN® Ultra Concentrated dishwashing liquid with original aroma • Distilled water Note: All the ingredients of the material simulant Fats can be purchased at grocery stores, such as Wal-Mart® or online distributors. Some of the fecal material simulant ingredients are perishable foods and should be incorporated into the fecal material simulant at least two weeks before their expiration date.

Fecal material simulation mixing equipment: • Laboratory balance with an accuracy of 0.01 grams • 500 ml beaker • Small laboratory spatula • Stopwatch • IKA®-WERKE Agitator Eurostar Power Control-Vise with Turbine stirring rod R 1312 available from IKA® Works, Inc., Wilmington, North Carolina, United States.

Fecal material simulant mixing procedure: 1 . A 4-part mixture is created at room temperature by adding, in the following order, the following fecal material simulant ingredients (which are at room temperature) to the beaker at a temperature between 21 ° C and 25 ° C : 57% yogurt, 3% turmeric, 39.6% egg white and 0.4% gelatin. For example, for a total mix weight of 200.0 g, the mixture will have 114.0 g of yogurt, 6.0 g of turmeric, 79.2 g of egg whites, and 0.8 g of gelatin by using the balance of laboratory. 2. The 4-part mixture should be stirred to homogeneity by using the IKA-WERKE Eurostar agitator which is set at a speed of 50 RPM. The homogeneity will be reached in about 5 minutes (by using the stopwatch). The position of the beaker can be adjusted during stirring so that the entire mixture is stirred uniformly. If any of the materials of the mixture cling to the inside wall of the beaker, the small spatula is used to separate the mixing material from the inner wall and place it in the central part of the beaker. 3. A 1.3% DAWN solution is made by adding 1.3 grams of DAWN Ultra Concentrate to 98.7 grams of distilled water. The IKA®-WERKE Eurostar agitator and the turbine stirring rod R 1312 are used to mix the solution for 5 minutes at a speed of 50 RPM. 4. A quantity of 2.0 grams of the 1.3% DAWN solution is added to 200 grams of the 4 part mixture obtained in Step 2 for a total combined weight of 202 grams of fecal material simulant. The 2.0 grams of the 1.3% DAWN solution is stirred into the homogenous 4 part mixture carefully and only until homogeneity (approximately 2 minutes) at a speed of 50 RPM, by using the IKA®-WERKE Eurostar agitator. The final viscosity of the final fecal material simulant should be 390 ± 40 cP (centipoise) when measured at a shear rate of 10 s1 and a temperature of 37 ° C. 5. The fecal material simulant is allowed to equilibrate for approximately 24 hours in a refrigerator at a temperature of 7 ° C. It can be stored in a lidded and airtight container and refrigerated for up to 5 days at approximately 7 ° C. Before use, the fecal material simulant should be brought into equilibrium with the ambient temperature. It should be noted that several batches of simulant fecal material of similar viscosity can be combined with each other. For example, five batches of fecal material simulant of similar viscosity and each of 200 grams can be combined in a common container for a total volume of 1000 cc. It will take approximately 1 hour for 1000cc of fecal material simulant to equilibrate with room temperature.

Method to determine the viscosity of the fecal material simulant: The viscosity of the fecal material simulant is determined by the use of a Brookfield rheometer. The final viscosity of the fecal material simulant should be 390 ± 40 cP (centipoise) when measured at a shear rate of 10 s_1 and a temperature of 37 ° C.

Equipment : • Brookfield DV-III ULTRA model LV rheometer with a spindle # SCA-28 • Rheocalc software provided by Brookfield Method: 1. Invert gently (2 to 3 times by hand with slow rhythm for about 5 seconds) the closed container of fecal material simulant before loading it into the cartridge to reduce the accumulation of particles in the bottom. 2. According to the instructions found in the operator's manual for the rheometer, the simulant of fecal material, in an amount of 17 ml, is added to the cartridge by means of a syringe and placed in the Thermosel which is kept at a constant temperature of 37 ° C. 3. Rheocalc is programmed to run at 30-second intervals between each RPM (revolutions per minute) starting at .01 RPM followed by 0.03, 0.07, 0.10, 0.50, 1.00, 3.00, 7.00, 10.0, 20.0, 50.0, 100.0, and 200.0 and descending to 100.0, 50.0, 20.0, 7.00, 3.00, 1.00, 0.50, 0.10, 0.07, 0.03, and 0.01. 4. Viscosity as a function of the shear rate curve can be established from the Rheocalc data. From that curve the viscosity can be determined at a shear rate of 10 / s. 5. The test is repeated three times by using three different batches of fecal material simulant to establish the viscosity range for the simulant at 10 / s.

Experimental absorbent compounds: The experimental absorbent compounds are used in some examples described herein. The following is a description of how experimental absorbent compounds are prepared.

Materials: o External coating: Berry Plastics XP-8695H interior coating film available from Berry Plastics, Evansville, Indiana, United States.

The body-oriented material, the secondary coating, the absorbent body, the acquisition layer, and the fluid transfer layer are unique to each example and specific materials are designated for each example as described herein. o Construction adhesive: H2525A available from Bostik Inc., United States. o Adhesive glue gun nozzle construction: One-piece spray nozzle with an orifice diameter of 0.012 inches, available as manufacturing part no. 152168 from Nordson Corporation, U.S.

Preparation of Materials: 1. Material oriented to the body (if present in the composite): Cut to a minimum size of 16 inches long by 6.5 inches wide. 2. Secondary coating (if present in the composite): Cut to a minimum size of 16 inches long by 6.5 inches wide. 3. Acquisition layer (if present in the composite): Cut to a size of 6 inches long by 4 inches wide. 4. Fluid transfer layer (if present in the composite): Cut to a size of 11.3 inches long by 4 inches wide. 5. Outer coating: Cut to a minimum size of 16 inches long by 6.5 inches wide.

Assembly instructions for an experimental absorbent composite that has a material oriented towards the body, an absorbent body and the external coating: 1. Attach the absorbent body, centered in the directions of length and width, to the outer covering by using 15 g / m2 of construction adhesive to attach the reinforcing sheet of the absorbent body to the outer covering. 2. Apply 17.5 g / m2 of construction adhesive to the entire exposed surface of the absorbent composite constructed so far, including the exposed outer coating and the absorbent body. 3. Join the material facing the body, centered in the directions of length and width, to the absorbent compound, which includes the outer covering and the absorbent body. 4. Soften any wrinkles in the material facing the body and ensure that it adheres well to the adhesive. 5. Ensure that all materials present in the composite material adhere in place by firmly pressing on the 1.5-inch perimeter. 6. Cut the assembled absorbent compound. The final size should be 6 inches wide by 15.5 inches long. 7. Mark the area of aggression 6 inches from the back end of the absorbent body with a single small dot with a permanent marker. The point should be placed on the midline in the transverse direction of the absorbent body.

Assembly instructions for an experimental absorbent composite having a body oriented material, a fluid transfer layer, an absorbent body and the external coating: 1. Join the absorbent body, centered on the directions of the length and width, to the outer covering by the use of 15 g / m2 of construction adhesive to join the reinforcing sheet of the absorbent body to the outer covering. 2. Attach the fluid transfer layer to the absorbent body by using 11 g / m2 of construction adhesive. The median line of the width of the fluid transfer layer should be aligned with the median line of the width of the absorbent body. 3. Apply 17.5 g / m2 of construction adhesive to the entire exposed surface of the absorbent composite constructed so far, which includes the exposed exterior coating, the components of the absorbent body, and the fluid transfer layer. 4. Join the body-oriented material, centered in the directions of length and width, to the absorbent compound, which includes the outer coating, the absorbent body and the fluid transfer layer. 5. Follow steps 4-7 above for an experimental absorbent compound having a body oriented material, an absorbent body and the outer coating.

Assembly instructions for an experimental absorbent composite having a material oriented towards the body, an acquisition layer, an absorbent body and the outer coating: 1. Attach the absorbent body, centered in the directions of length and width, to the outer covering by using 15 g / m2 of construction adhesive to attach the reinforcing sheet of the absorbent body to the outer covering. 2. Apply 17.5 g / m2 of construction adhesive to the entire exposed surface of the absorbent composite constructed so far, including the exposed exterior coating and the absorbent body. 3. Attach the acquisition layer to the material facing the body by using construction adhesive. The acquisition layer and the material facing the body should be aligned in the midline of the width of the material facing the body. 4. Attach the body oriented material and the acquisition layer to the absorbent composite including the outer coating and the absorbent body. 5. Follow steps 4-7 above for an experimental absorbent compound having a body oriented material, an absorbent body and the outer coating.

Assembly instructions for an experimental absorbent composite that has a material oriented towards the body, an acquisition layer, a fluid transfer layer, an absorbent body and external coating: 1. Attach the absorbent body, centered in the directions of length and width, to the outer covering by using 15 g / m2 of construction adhesive to attach the reinforcing sheet of the absorbent body to the outer covering. 2. Attach the fluid transfer layer to the absorbent body by using 11 g / m2 of construction adhesive. The median line of the width of the fluid transfer layer should be aligned with the median line of the width of the absorbent body. 3. Apply 17.5 g / m2 of construction adhesive to the entire exposed surface of the absorbent composite constructed so far, which includes the exposed exterior coating, the components of the absorbent body, and the fluid transfer layer.

Four . Attach the acquisition layer to the material facing the body by using construction adhesive.

The acquisition layer and the material facing the body should be aligned in the midline of the width of the material facing the body. 5 . Joining the body oriented material and the acquisition layer of the absorbent compound including the outer coating, the absorbent body and the fluid transfer layer. The acquisition layer and layer of Fluid transfer should be aligned in the middle line of the width of the absorbent compound. 6. Follow steps 4-7 above for an experimental absorbent composite having a body oriented material, an absorbent body and an outer coating.

Assembly instructions for an experimental absorbent composite having a body oriented material, a secondary coating, an acquisition layer, a fluid transfer layer, an absorbent body and the external coating: 1. Attach the absorbent body, centered in the directions of length and width, to the outer covering by using 15 g / m2 of construction adhesive to attach the reinforcing sheet of the absorbent body to the outer covering. 2 . Attach the fluid transfer layer to the absorbent body by using 11 g / m2 of construction adhesive. The median line of the width of the fluid transfer layer should be aligned with the median line of the width of the absorbent body. 3. Apply 17.5 g / m2 of construction adhesive to the entire exposed surface of the absorbent composite constructed so far, including the exposed exterior coating, the components of the absorbent body, and the fluid transfer layer. 4. Attach the secondary liner to the material facing the body with the construction adhesive. The secondary coating should be aligned in the midline of the width of the material facing the body. 5. Attach the acquisition layer to the secondary lining by using the construction adhesive. The acquisition layer, the material facing the body, and the secondary coating should be aligned in the midline of the width of the material facing the body. 6. Attach the body oriented material, the secondary coating and the acquisition layer to the absorbent composite including the outer coating, the absorbent body and the fluid transfer layer. The acquisition layer and fluid transfer layer should be aligned in the middle line of the width of the absorbent compound. 7. Follow steps 4-7 above for an experimental absorbent composite having a body oriented material, an absorbent body and an outer coating.

Assembly instructions for an experimental absorbent composite having a secondary coating, an acquisition layer, a fluid transfer layer, an absorbent body and external coating: 1. Attach the absorbent body, centered in the directions of length and width, to the outer covering by using 15 g / m2 of construction adhesive to attach the reinforcing sheet of the absorbent body to the outer covering. 2. Attach the fluid transfer layer to the absorbent body by using 11 g / m2 of construction adhesive. The median line of the width of the fluid transfer layer should be aligned with the median line of the width of the absorbent body. 3. Apply 17.5 g / m2 of construction adhesive to the entire exposed surface of the absorbent composite constructed so far, which includes the exposed exterior coating, the components of the absorbent body, and the fluid transfer layer. 4. Attach the acquisition layer to the secondary lining by using the construction adhesive. The acquisition layer and the secondary coating must be aligned in the middle line of the secondary coating width. 5 . Attach the secondary liner and the acquisition layer to the absorbent composite including the outer coating, the absorbent body and the fluid transfer layer. The acquisition layer and layer of Fluid transfer should be aligned in the middle line of the width of the absorbent compound. 6. Soften any wrinkles in the secondary coating and ensure that it adheres well to any adhesive not covered by the acquisition layer. 7. Follow steps 5-7 above for an experimental absorbent composite having a body oriented material, the absorbent body and an outer coating.

Propagation on the simulant surface of fecal and residual material on the simulant surface of fecal matter: Test equipment and supplies: • Injection apparatus (an illustrative configuration is illustrated in Figures 41 and 42) • Scales with a precision of 0.01 • Electronic digital gauge (VWR International model 62379-531) • Digital thickness gauge (Mitutoyo type IDF-1050E, and an example configuration is illustrated in Figure 40) • Vacuum box (an example configuration is illustrated in Figures 44-46) • Digital kitchen timer, readable to 1 second • Digital camera (an example configuration is illustrated in Figure 43) • Ruler • Fecal material simulant, as described herein, which is used at room temperature • Scott® paper towels (Mega Roll Choose A Size) • Absorbent compounds for each absorbent compound test code as described herein Equipment configuration: 1. Weigh in advance a single paper towel which, as described below, will be used to clean the intermediate plate 244 of the clean injection device 240 of fecal material simulant. 2. Weigh previously four sheets of paper towels which, as described below, will be placed on the top of the absorbent compound when the absorbent compound makes the transition to the vacuum box. 3. With reference to Figure 40, a digital thickness gauge is configured to obtain the volume measurement of an absorbent composite. The digital thickness meter includes a granite base 232 having a holding shaft 231 where the upper surface 233 of the granite base 232 is flat and smooth. A suitable granite base 232 is a Starret Granite Base, model 653G (available from L.S. Starrett Company, which has an establishment located in Athol, Massachusetts, United States) or equivalent. An arm 235 is secured to the clamping shaft 231 at one end 236 of the clamping arm 235, and a digital thickness gauge 230 is secured to the clamping arm 235 at the opposite end 237. A vertically movable piston 238 extends downward to from the indicator 230. A circular plate 234 is attached to the distal end 239 of the plunger 238 having a diameter of 76.2 mm. Plate 234 is constructed of acrylic and is flat and smooth at least on the bottom surface. The thickness and weight of the platen 234 are configured such that the digital thickness gauge 230 provides a pressure of 0.05 psi (.345 kPa). To zero the digital thickness meter 230, ensure that the granite surface 233 is clear of debris and the position of the platen 234 and the plunger 238 so that the bottom surface of the platen 234 only touches the granite surface 233 After the digital thickness meter 230 is set to zero, lift the plate 234 and insert an absorbent compound between the plate 234 and the granite surface 233. The absorbent compound must have a size dimension of at least 90 mm by 102 mm. Lower the plate 234 and the plunger 238 so that the bottom surface of the plate 234 only touches the surface of the absorbent compound as illustrated in Figure 40. A pressure of 0.05 psi (.345 kPa) is applied to the absorbent compound when plate 234 is lowered. Measure and record the volume of 5 absorbent compounds for each absorbent compound test code. Calculate an average volume for the absorbent compound test code by the average volume of the 5 absorbent compounds measured for each absorbent compound test code. 4. With reference to Figures 41 and 42, an injection apparatus 240 is configured to deliver 10 cc of fecal material simulant at a rate of 15 cc per second. The injection apparatus 240 has an upper plate 242, an intermediate plate 244, and a lower plate 246. The upper plate 242 has a height H1 of 12.42 mm, the intermediate plate 244 has a height H2 of 12.2 mm, and the lower plate it has a height H3 of 12.2 mm. The upper plate 242 and the lower plate 246 each have a length L1 of 305 mm and a width W1 of 165 mm. The upper plate 242 is placed on, aligned with, and connected to the lower plate 246 through the use of four threaded rods containing plastic ear screws 248, which are located near the corners of each of the plate upper 242 and lower plate 246. Intermediate plate 244, located between upper plate 242 and lower plate 246, has a length L2 of 152 mm and a width W2 of 102 mm and is suspended from the center of the upper plate 242 with the use of four bolts 250, located near the corners of the intermediate plate 244. The injection apparatus 240 has a fecal material simulation injection tube 252 located above and which is positioned perpendicular to the upper plate 242. The fecal material simulation injection tube 252 has a length of 7 inches and an inner diameter of 6.4 mm. The tube is made with Norprene® to allow delivery of the fecal material simulant through the tube and over the absorbent compound. The fecal material simulator injection tube 252 is connected to the upper plate 242, through an adapter with hose tabs 243 having a diameter of 0.25 inches. The adapter with hose tabs 243 passes through the upper plate 242, through a hole cut in the upper plate 242, and the intermediate plate 244, to deliver the simulant of fecal material, through a hole cut through from the intermediate plate 244, to the absorbent composite that is placed on the surface of the lower plate 246. The adapter with hose tabs 243 is threaded into the intermediate plate 244 to create a seal. The hole that is cut through the intermediate plate 244 has an opening that has the shape of a cone 245 with a diameter of 0.88 inches. The adapter with hose tabs is manufactured by Parker with a manufacturing number of 125HB-3-4 and is available from MSC Industrial Supply Company. The fecal material simulator injection tube 252 is held in place on the upper plate 242 of the injection apparatus 240 with a valve holding block 254 containing a solenoid throttle valve 255 which can be opened to allow the simulant of fecal material to pass through tube 252 and to close to prevent the fecal material simulant from passing through tube 252. The solenoid clamp valve is a two-way valve, normally closed with 24 VDC. The solenoid clamp valve is available from NResearch, Inc., part number 648P012. 5. With reference to Figure 43, a digital camera 260 operating in color mode is configured to visually record the appearance of an absorbent composite after delivery of fecal material simulant. The digital camera 260 is a Pixelink (Model: PL-A742) which has a pixel array of 1280x1024 and which operates at a frame rate of 10.2 Hertz in color mode. A Pentax TV 262 lens (Model: C6Z1218M3-2) attaches to the Pixelink 260 camera via a C-mount adapter. The Pentax 262 lens system allows the lens 262 focus to be adjusted by the accompanying software loaded on the computer of the system. The camera / lens system 262 is connected to the computer through an IEEE 1394 Firewire port (not shown). The chamber 260 and the lens 262 are attached to a VP-400 Bencher 264 camera stand. The face of the Pentax lens 268 is placed at a distance D4 of 94 cm above the base. 266 of the VP-Bencher 264 camera stand. An illuminated absorbent composite well 270 is at a distance D6 of 16 cm below the base 266 of the mounting post VP-400264. The distance D7 from the front face of the Pantex lens 262 to the absorbent composite is 110 cm. The absorbent composite well 270 is illuminated on all four sides 272 with a series of fluorescent lights 18 Sylvania GE miniature with a power of 8 watts per bulb. A 1/8"thick frosted glass diffuser plate 271 is located between the bulbs and the well of absorbent composite 270. The chamber 260 should be kept at the same distance and the same settings for all the images to eliminate the variability between the Absorbent Compounds A ruler is placed in the well of absorbent composite 270 and is also captured in the digital image of the absorbent composite for the subsequent spatial calibration reference when determining the propagation size of the fecal material simulant in the absorbent composite. They are acquired in JPEG format. 6. With reference to Figures 44-46, a vacuum apparatus 320 is prepared. The vacuum apparatus 320 comprises a vacuum chamber 322 supported on four leg members 324. The vacuum chamber 322 includes a front wall member 326, a rear wall member 328, and two side wall members 330 and 332. The wall members are the thick enough to withstand the anticipated vacuum pressures (5 inches of water), and are constructed and arranged to provide a chamber that has exterior measurement dimensions of 23.5 inches (59.7 cm) in length, 14 inches (35.6 cm) in width and 8 inches (203 cm) deep. A vacuum pump (not shown) operatively connects to the vacuum chamber 322 through an appropriate vacuum line conduit and a vacuum valve 334. In addition, a suitable air purge line is connected in the vacuum chamber 322 through an air bleed valve 336. On the rear wall 328 a suspension assembly 338 is suitably mounted and configured with the curved S-ends to provide a convenient resting place for supporting a latex dam sheet 340 in a convenient position away from the upper part of the vacuum apparatus 320. A suitable suspension assembly 338 can be constructed from a 0.25 inch (0.64 cm) diameter stainless steel rod. The latex dam sheet 340 is wound around a pin member 342 to facilitate gripping and to allow convenient movement and positioning of the latex dam sheet 340. In the illustrated position, the pin member 342 is shown supported on a suspension assembly 338 for positioning the latex dam sheet 340 in an open position, away from the top of the vacuum chamber 322. A lower edge of the latex dam sheet 340 is held against a rear edge support member 344 with suitable attachment means, such as security clips 346. The security clips 346 mounted on the rear wall element 328 with suitable spacers 348 that provide an appropriate orientation and alignment of the security clamps 346 for the desired operation. Two support shafts 350 are 1.5 inches in diameter and removably mounted within the vacuum chamber 322 by support supports 352. The support supports 352 are generally equally spaced along the front wall member 326 and the rear wall element 328 and arranged in cooperating pairs. In addition, the support supports 352 are constructed and arranged to properly position the upper portions of the supporting shafts 350 flush with the upper part of the front, rear and side wall members of the vacuum chamber 322. Therefore, the support shafts 350 are positioned substantially parallel to each other and generally align with the side wall members 330 and 332. In addition to the back edge support member 344, the vacuum apparatus 320 includes a front support member 354 and two members side supports 356 and 358. Each side support member measures approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm) in width and approximately 1.25 inches (3.2 cm) in height. The lengths of the support members are suitably constructed to surround the periphery of the open upper edges of the vacuum chamber 322, and are positioned to project above the upper edges of the members of the chamber wall by a distance of approximately 0.5 inches. A layer of egg carton-type material 360 is placed on the upper part of the supporting shafts 350 and the upper edges of the wall members of the vacuum chamber 322. The egg carton material extends over an area generally rectangular that measures 23.5 inches (59.7 cm) by 14 inches (35.6 cm) and has a depth measurement of approximately 0.38 inches (1.0 cm). The individual cells of the egg carton structure measure approximately 0.5 square inch, and the material of the thin sheet comprising the egg carton is composed of a suitable material, such as polystyrene. For example, the egg carton material may be McMaster-Carr Supply translucent diffuser panel material, No. 1624K14 in Catalog (available from McMaster-Carr Supply Company, which has a place of business in Atlanta, Georgia, United States). A screening layer coated with 6 mm (0.24 inch) Teflon mesh 362 (available from Eagle Supply and Plastics, Inc., which has a place of business in Appleton, Wisconsin, United States), which measures 23.5 inches (59.7 cm) ) by 14 inches (35.6 cm), it is placed in the upper part of the egg carton material 360. A suitable drainage line and a drain valve 364 connect the lower plate member 366 of the vacuum chamber 322 to provide a convenient mechanism for draining the liquid from the chamber. Vacuum 322. The various wall members and support members of the vacuum apparatus 320 may be comprised of a suitable non-corrosive moisture resistant material, such as polycarbonate plastic. The various gasket assemblies can be fixed by solvent welding and / or fasteners, and the finished assembly of the vacuum apparatus 320 is constructed to be water resistant. A vacuum gauge 368 is operatively connected through a conduit 370 in the vacuum chamber 322. A suitable vacuum gauge 368 is a Magnahelic differential meter capable of measuring a vacuum of 0-50 inches of water, such as a meter no. .2050C available from Dwyer Instrument Incorporated (which has a place of business in Michigan City, Indiana, United States).

Delivery of fecal material simulant and determination of residual fecal material simulant: 1. Adjust the positioning of the upper plate 242 of the injection apparatus 240 relative to the lower plate 246 of the injection apparatus 240 by using the adjustable height screws 248 to raise and lower the upper plate 242 of the injection apparatus 240. The top plate 242 of the injection apparatus 240 must be raised and lowered for each absorbent compound test code based on the average volume of each absorbent compound test code. Since the intermediate plate 244 is attached to the upper plate 242, raising and lowering the upper plate 242 also raises and lowers the intermediate plate 244. The upper plate 242 of the injection apparatus 240 must be raised and lowered for each compound test code absorber so that the distance D8 between the bottom surface 256 of the middle plate 244 and the upper surface 258 of the lower plate 246 is equivalent to the average volume of the absorbent compound test code being evaluated. After adjusting the position of the upper plate 242 to establish the distance D8, a level should be placed on the upper part of the upper plate 242 to ensure that the upper plate 242 is level. If the top plate 242 is not leveled, then the height adjustable screws 248 must be adjusted to ensure that the top plate 242 is level, while maintaining the distance D8. 2. Position an absorbent compound of an absorbent compound test code between the intermediate plate 244 and the lower plate 246 of the injection apparatus 240. Align the zone of aggression of the absorbent compound below the injection tube of fecal material simulant 252. 3. Reset the digital kitchen thermometer. 4. Inject 10 cc of the fecal material simulant at a rate of 15 cc / s through the injection tube of fecal material simulator 252 to deliver the fecal material simulant to the aggression zone of the absorbent compound. 5. Upon delivery of the fecal material simulant to the aggression zone of the absorbent compound, start the digital firing timer and allow the absorbent compound to remain at rest for two minutes. 6. After the two minutes have elapsed, lift the upper plate 242 and the middle plate 244 of the injection apparatus 240, carefully remove the absorbent compound from the injection apparatus 240, and keep the absorbent composite flat and free of any additional contact with the surfaces of the middle plate 244 and the top plate 242. The absorbent compound having a fecal material simulation spot is placed in the well of the illuminated absorbent composite 270, under the optical axis of the Pentax lens 262. 7. The absorbent compound is in a flat configuration and visible-size wrinkles are removed by gentle manual manipulation by the analyst. The absorbent compound is oriented so that the machine direction (MD) runs in the horizontal direction of the resulting image. The absorbent compound is illuminated with light fluorescent. The lights are connected to a standard 110 volt power source and illuminated completely. Align the ruler with the absorbent compound and photograph the absorbent compound located in the well of the absorbent composite 270 by using the digital camera 260. The ruler is positioned so that it is shown just below the absorbent composite in the image (longitudinally in the direction of the machine). The digital image of the absorbent composite is used to determine, as described below, the propagation area of the fecal material simulant. 8. The four sheets of pre-weighed paper towels are placed in the egg carton material and the Teflon mesh sieve of the vacuum apparatus. The four sheets are placed with the graphics down towards the vacuum chamber. The four sheets are folded in half and then folded in half again. The absorbent compound is then placed face down on the top of the four sheets of paper towels. The latex dam sheet is then placed on the absorbent composite and the four sheets of paper towels, as well as all the egg carton material and the Teflon coated sieve so that the latex dam sheet creates a seal when makes the vacuum in the vacuum apparatus. 9. Apply vacuum pressure to the combination of absorbent compound and the four sheets of paper towels previously weighed to 5 inches of water (0.18 psi) for 1 minute. 10. After 1 minute has elapsed, the latex dam sheet is reverted and the absorbent composite and the four sheets of pre-weighed paper towels are removed from the vacuum apparatus. Remove the four sheets of pre-weighed paper towels from the absorbent compound and reweigh the four sheets of pre-weighed paper towels. Determine the amount of fecal material simulant transferred to the four sheets of paper towels previously weighed by subtracting the previously weighed weight of the four sheets of paper towels from the weight that is reweighed to the four sheets of towels paper. 11. Use the individual pre-weighed paper towel to remove any Simulated fecal material simulation remaining in the intermediate plate 244 of the injection apparatus 240. Clean the intermediate plate 244 with the pre-weighed paper towel to remove any remaining fecal material simulant and reweigh the individual paper towel. Determine the amount of fecal material simulant that remained in the middle plate 244 by subtracting the previously weighed weight of the individual paper towel from the weight returned despite the towel individual paper. 12. Determine the total amount of residual fecal material simulant by the sum of the amount of fecal material transferred to the four sheets of pre-weighed paper towels and the amount of fecal material simulant remaining in the intermediate plate 244 of the injection apparatus 240 . 13. Clean the middle plate of the 244 injection device between each injection of fecal material simulant. 14. Repeat the above process for each absorbent compound of each absorbent compound test code.

Determination of the propagation area of fecal material simulant: The area of propagation of a fecal material simulant spot in a given combination of absorbent article components can be determined by the use of the image analysis measurement method described herein. Generally, the image analysis measurement method determines a numerical area dimensional value for a fecal material simulant spot through a combination of specific image analysis measurement parameters. The area of propagation is determined by the use of conventional optical image analysis techniques to detect regions of spots and measure parameters such as the area when observed with a camera with incident lighting. An image analysis system, controlled by an algorithm, can detect and measure several other dimensional properties of a fecal material simulant spot. The resulting measurement data can be used to compare the effectiveness of different combinations of layers of absorbent articles with respect to restriction and minimization of the propagation area of a fecal material simulant.

The method for determining the propagation area of fecal material simulant over a given absorbent compound includes the step of acquiring a digital image of the absorbent compound after an assault with the fecal material simulant, as described above (see method for the supply of fecal material simulant). After acquisition of the digital image of the absorbent composite, the determination of the area of propagation of fecal material simulant over a given absorbent composite includes the step of performing multiple dimensional measurements. The image analysis software platform used to perform the dimensional measurements is QWIN Pro (Version 3.5.1) available from Leica Microsystems, which has an office in Heerbrugg, Switzerland. The system and images are also accurately calibrated by using QWIN software and a standard rule with at least as small metric marks as a millimeter that is placed next to the sample during the acquisition of the images. The calibration is performed in the horizontal dimension of the video camera image. Units of centimeters per pixel are used for the calibration. Specifically, an image analysis algorithm is used to process digital images, as well as to make measurements using the Quantimet Interactive User Programming System (QUIPS) language. The image analysis algorithm is reproduced below.

NAME = Coverage-Size - BM in Diapers - 2a PURPOSE = Measures the coverage and size of the BM on the body facing of the absorbent product ENTER SAMPLE ID AND OPEN DATA FILE PauseText ("Enter EXCEL data file name now.") Entry (FILE NAME $) OPEN FILE $ = "C: \ Data \ 36775 \" + N0MBREARCHIV0 $ + ".xls" Open file (OPEN FILE $, channel #CAN) CALIBRATE IMAGE - Valorcal = 0.0258 cm / px VALORCAL = 0.0258 Calibrate (VALORCAL UNIDADESCAL $ per pixel) Enter caption of results Archive result heading (channel # 1) Archive line (channel # 1) DUPLICATE = 0 SAMPLE = 0 ACQSALIDA = 0 CONFIGURATION Image frame (x 0, y 0, width 1280, height 1024) Measurement frame (x 31, y 61, width 1218, height 962) For (SAMPLE = 1 to 156, step 1) PauseText ("Enter the title of the image file") Entry (TITLE $) Archive (TITLE $, channel # 1) Archive line (channel # 1) ACQUIRE IMAGE ACQSALID = 0 - Comment: The following line must be adjusted to read from the directory where the images are located.

Read image [PAUSE] (from the file C: \ lmtratos \ 36775 \ zone Set \ codeA3fulll.jpg in ColorO) Transform Color (RGB to HSI, from ColorO to ColorO) Image Window (Auto Size, Auto Color, Lut not Auto, Fit Image to Window, Without Warning Before Overwriting, Do Not Load or Save Annotations with the Images, Do not Save Microscope Data with the Image, Do Not Load or Save References Data with the Image) DETECTION AND PROCESSING OF IMAGE Pause Text ("Select the optimal detection of colors") Color Detection [PAUSE] (HSI +: 134-183, 140-255, 88-255, ColorO in BinaryO) Identify Binary (BinaryObractive Character BinaryO) Amend Binary (Close from BinaryO to Binariol, cycles 8, Disk operator, erode edges on) Identify Binary (Fill Binariol Holes to Binary2) Amend Binary (Open from Binary2 to Binary3, cycles 8, Disk operator, erode edges on) PauseText ("Edit and select only those regions that should be measured.") Edit Binary [PAUSE] (Accept from Binary3 to Binary4, tip Filling, width 2) MEASURE CHARACTERISTICS OF PARAMETERS Measure characteristics (Binary plane4, 32 Ferets, minimum zone: 75, gray image: ColorO) Selected parameters: Area, X FCP, and FCP Archive line (channel # 1) File Characteristics Results (channel # 1) Archive line (channel # 1) Archive line (channel # 1) Next (SAMPLE) Close File (channel # 1) END The QUIPS algorithm is executed through the use of the software platform QWIN Pro. Initially the analyst is asked to enter the EXCEL file name of the output data. Following is an order to enter the absorbent compound test code information that is sent to the EXCEL file.

The analyst is now asked to enter the title of the complete digital image file that can be obtained from the list of computer directories of the digital images to be analyzed. The directory containing the images is usually placed on the computer's hard drive and can be accessed on the desktop screen via MS Windows. Information about the title of the image file is now automatically sent to the EXCEL file. Then the same title of the digital image file can also be pasted on the line of the window to Read image. Now the digital image is read from the directory to the QWIN software screen. The digital image will show the absorbent compound and any simulant spot of fecal material in color. It is indicated that the line of code in the algorithm associated with reading the digital image must be pre-configured to read from the designated hard disk directory of the computer containing the files to be analyzed before the execution of the algorithms.

The analyst is now requested to "Select optimal color detection", by adjusting the detection threshold, if necessary, in order to obtain the best possible detection. The hue-saturation-intensity color detection mode is used in the Coverage-Size algorithm - BM in Diapers - 2a. Normally, only saturation and / or intensity levels will need small adjustments to optimize detection. The detection settings for the algorithm can be predetermined before analyzing a set of images by using QWIN and color tone detection mode-saturation-intensity in the QUIPS algorithm with a pair of representative images. The adjustments can be considered optimized when the spot is covered by the overlapping detection binary with respect to its outer limits and the areas within the limits. The degree of coincidence between the overlapping binary image and the spot image can be checked during optimization by activating and deactivating the binary by using the 'control' and 'B' keys.

After the detection and a series of stages of automatic processing of digital images, the analyst is interrogated to "Edit and select only those regions that should be measured". This is done simply by using the computer mouse to manually select the spot region of fecal material simulant that you want to measure. The user can press the 'control' and? 'on the keyboard at the same time to activate and deactivate the overlapping binary image. An adjustment between the binary image and the fecal material simulant stain is considered good when the binary image closely matches the faecal material simulant stain with respect to its limits and regions within the limits.

The algorithm will then automatically perform the measurements and output the data in the designated EXCEL spreadsheet file. The following data of the primary measurement parameters can be found in the EXCEL file after the measurements and data transfer: Area In a single execution of the QUIPS algorithm multiple duplicates of a digital image can be made from individual or multiple absorbent compounds. The average propagation value of the final sample is generally based on an analysis N = 5 of five compounds separate absorbers, of an absorbent compound test code. By using Student's T-test at the 90% confidence level, a comparison between the different samples can be made.

Example 2: The area of simulant propagation of fecal material on an absorbent compound can be measured. This measurement can provide an understanding of how well a given absorbent composite design can minimize the spread on the surface of fecal material through a contact surface with the body of an absorbent composite. The area of propagation, measured in era2, of the simulated faecal matter can be determined after an assault of 10 cc of fecal material simulant, as described herein, at 15 cc / s.

In this example, eight different experimental absorbent compound test codes were evaluated for the fecal material simulant propagation area on the body contact surface of the absorbent compound test code. Five absorbent compounds were assembled by hand for each absorbent compound test code in accordance with Table 4 below, using the descriptions of the corresponding materials listed in Table 3: Descriptions of the Materials above. Each absorbent compound was submitted to the supply of an aggression of 10 cc of fecal simulant, as described herein, at 15 cc / s and each absorbent compound of each absorbent compound test code was analyzed according to the test method. Fecal material simulant described herein.

Table 4: Experimental Absorbent Compound Test Codes: It should be noted that "N / A" means that for the absorbent compound test code in question, that particular material is not present. Thus, for example, for the Absorbent Compound Test Code 1, the assembled absorbent composites had the body oriented material "A" (as described in Table 3) adhesively bonded to the acquisition layer "G" (as described in Table 3) without an additional layer of material between the two components. It is to be understood that the body oriented material "A" would be the body contact surface of the Absorbent Compound Test Code 1. In addition, as an example, the Absorbent Compound Test Code 5 is an absorbent composite assembled with the body-oriented material "A" (as described in Table 3) adhesively bonded to the fluid transfer layer "K" (as described in Table 3) without additional layers between the two components. It is to be understood that the body oriented material "A" would be the body contact surface of the Absorbent Compound Test Code 5.

With respect to the assembled absorbent composites, the body-oriented material is adhesively bonded to the body-facing surface of the acquisition layer or the body-facing surface of the fluid transfer layer, depending on the code of absorbent compound test. If present, the garment facing surface of the acquisition layer is adhesively bonded to the fluid transfer layer. The fluid transfer layer is adhesively bonded to the absorbent body. The absorbent body is adhesively bonded to the outer coating (as described in Table 3). The absorbent compounds did not have any elastic of the legs or waist and did not have any containment flaps.

As illustrated in Figure 47, the design of the absorbent composite has an impact on the amount of fecal material simulant propagation area in an absorbent compound test code. As illustrated in Figure 47, the absorbent compound test codes that had an acquisition layer present as part of their design had lower faecal simulant propagation area than the absorbent compound test codes that did not have an acquisition layer present as part of its design. As illustrated in Figure 47, with respect to the absorbent composite test codes containing an acquisition layer, the absorbent composite test codes having a body facing material 28 with contact areas having about 5% to about 10% of open area reduced the spread area of fecal material simulant to a greater extent than the remaining absorbent compound test codes that also contained an acquisition layer as part of their design.

Example 3: The area of simulant propagation of fecal material on an absorbent compound can be measured. This measurement can provide an understanding of how well a given absorbent composite design can minimize the spread on the surface of fecal material through a surface of contact with the body of an absorbent compound. The area of propagation, measured in cm2, of the simulated fecal matter can be determined after an aggression of 10 cc of fecal material simulant, as described herein, at 15 cc / s.

In this example, twenty different experimental absorbent composite test codes were evaluated for the fecal material simulant propagation area on the body contact surface of the absorbent compound test code. Five absorbent compounds were assembled by hand for each absorbent compound test code in accordance with Table 5 below, using the descriptions of the corresponding materials listed in Table 3: Descriptions of the Materials above. Each absorbent compound was subjected to the supply of an aggression of 10 cc of fecal simulant, as described herein, at 15 cc / s and each absorbent compound of each absorbent compound test code was analyzed according to the method of test Propagation area of the fecal material simulant described here.

Table 5. Experimental Absorbent Compound Test Codes It should be noted that "N / A" means that for the absorbent compound test code in question, that particular material is not present. Thus, for example, for the Absorbent Compound Test Code 1, the assembled absorbent composites had the body oriented material "A" (as described in Table 3) adhesively bonded to the "F" acquisition layer. (as described in Table 3) without an additional layer of material between the two components. It is to be understood that the body-oriented material "A" would be the contact surface with the body of the Absorbent Compound Test Code 1. In addition, as an example, the Absorbent Compound Test Code 5 is an absorbent composite assembled with the "E" coating (as described in Table 3) adhesively bonded to the "F" acquisition layer (as described in FIG. Table 3). It should be understood that "E" coating would be the body contact surface of the absorbent compound test code 5. It should also be noted that some absorbent compound test codes contained a double layer of the acquisition layer as indicated in Table 5 above.

With respect to the assembled absorbent compounds, the material oriented towards the body or the coating secondary, depending on the absorbent compound test code, is adhesively bonded to the body facing surface of the acquisition layer. The garment-facing surface of the acquisition layer is adhesively bonded to the fluid transfer layer and the fluid transfer layer is adhesively bonded to the absorbent body. The absorbent body is adhesively bonded to the outer coating (as described in Table 3). The absorbent compounds did not have any elastic of the legs or waist and did not have any containment flaps.

As illustrated in Figure 48, the design of the absorbent composite has an impact on the amount of fecal material simulant propagation area in an absorbent compound test code. As illustrated in Figure 48, the absorbent compound test codes with the material facing the body (Material Codes "A" and "C") as the body contact surface had lower simulant propagation area of fecal material than the test codes of absorbent composites that had the secondary coating material (Material Code "E") as the contact surface with the body.

Example 4: The area of simulant propagation of fecal material on an absorbent compound can be measured. This measurement it can provide an understanding of how well a given absorbent composite design can minimize the spread on the surface of fecal material through a contact surface with the body of an absorbent composite. The area of propagation, measured in cm2, of the simulated fecal matter can be determined after an aggression of 10 cc of fecal material simulant, as described herein, at 15 cc / s.

In this example, six different experimental absorbent composite test codes were evaluated for the fecal material simulant propagation area on the body contact surface of the absorbent compound test code. Five absorbent compounds were assembled by hand for each absorbent compound test code in accordance with Table 6 below, using the descriptions of the corresponding materials listed in Table 3: Descriptions of the Materials above. Each absorbent compound was subjected to the supply of an aggression of 10 cc of fecal simulant, as described herein, at 15 cc / s and each absorbent compound of each absorbent compound test code was analyzed according to the method of test Propagation area of the fecal material simulant described here.

Table 6: Experimental Absorbent Compound Test Codes: It should be noted that "N / A" means that for the absorbent compound test code in question, that particular material is not present. Thus, for example, for the Absorbent Compound Test Code 1, the assembled absorbent composites had the body oriented material "A" (as described in Table 3) adhesively bonded to the acquisition layer "I" (as described in Table 3) without an additional layer of material between the two components. It should be understood that the body-oriented material "A" would be the contact surface with the body of the Absorbent Compound Test Code 1. In addition, as For example, the Absorbent Compound Test Code 3 is an absorbent composite assembled with the "E" coating (as described in Table 3) adhesively bonded to the acquisition layer "I" (as described in the Table). 3). It should be understood that "E" coating would be the body contact surface of the Absorbent Compound Test Code 3.

With regard to the assembled absorbent compounds, the body oriented material or the secondary coating, depending on the absorbent compound test code, is adhesively bonded to the body facing surface of the acquisition layer. The garment-facing surface of the acquisition layer is adhesively bonded to the fluid transfer layer and the fluid transfer layer is adhesively bonded to the absorbent body. The absorbent body is adhesively bonded to the outer coating (as described in Table 3). The absorbent compounds did not have any elastic of the legs or waist and did not have any containment flaps.

As illustrated in Figure 49, the design of the absorbent composite has an impact on the amount of fecal material simulant propagation area in an absorbent compound test code. As illustrated in Figure 49, the absorbent compound test codes with the Body-oriented material (Material Codes "A" and "C") as the contact surface with the body had lower spread area of fecal material simulant than the test codes of absorbent compounds that had the coating material secondary (Material code "E") as the contact surface with the body.

Example 5: The amount of residual fecal material on the contact surface with the body of an absorbent compound can be measured. This measurement can provide an understanding of how well a given absorbent composite design can minimize the amount of residual fecal material clustered on the surface of the contact surface with the body. The amount of waste fecal material can be determined, as described herein, by measuring the weight, in grams, of the fecal material simulant that can be removed from the contact surface with the body of the absorbent compound after two minutes.

In this example, eight different experimental absorbent composite test codes were evaluated for the amount of residual fecal material simulant on the contact surface with the body of the absorbent compound test code. Five absorbent compounds were assembled by hand for each absorbent compound test code according to Table 7 below, by the use of descriptions of the corresponding materials listed in Table 3: Descriptions of the Materials above. Each absorbent compound was subjected to the supply of an aggression of 10 cc of fecal material simulant, as described herein, at 15 cc / s and each absorbent compound of each absorbent compound test code was analyzed according to the method of Residual test on the surface of the fecal material simulant described here.

Table 7: Experimental Absorbent Compound Test Codes: It should be noted that "N / A" means that for the absorbent compound test code in question, that particular material is not present. Thus, for example, for the Absorbent Compound Test Code 1, the assembled absorbent composites had the body oriented material "A" (as described in Table 3) adhesively bonded to the "G" acquisition layer. (as described in Table 3) without an additional layer of material between the two components. It is to be understood that the body oriented material "A" would be the body contact surface of the Absorbent Compound Test Code 1. In addition, as an example, the Absorbent Compound Test Code 5 is an absorbent composite assembled with the body-oriented material "A" (as described in Table 3) adhesively bonded to the fluid transfer layer "K" (as described in Table 3) without additional layers between the two components. It is to be understood that the body oriented material "A" would be the body contact surface of the Absorbent Compound Test Code 5.

With respect to the assembled absorbent composites, the body-oriented material is adhesively bonded to the body-facing surface of the acquisition layer or the body-facing surface of the fluid transfer layer, depending on the code of absorbent compound test. If present, the The garment facing surface of the acquisition layer is adhesively bonded to the fluid transfer layer. The fluid transfer layer is adhesively bonded to the absorbent body. The absorbent body is adhesively bonded to the outer coating (as described in Table 3). The absorbent compounds did not have any elastic of the legs or waist and did not have any containment flaps.

As illustrated in Figure 50, the design of the absorbent composite has an impact on the amount of residual fecal material simulant on the surface of an absorbent compound test code. As illustrated in Figure 50, the absorbent compound test codes having an acquisition layer present as part of their design had a greater residual amount on the fecal material simulant surface of the surface in contact with the body of the composite. absorber than the absorbent compound test codes that did not have an acquisition layer present as part of their design.

Example 6: The amount of residual fecal material on the contact surface with the body of an absorbent compound can be measured. This measurement can provide an understanding of how well a given absorbent composite design can minimize the amount of residual fecal material pooled in the surface of the contact surface with the body. The amount of waste fecal material can be determined, as described herein, by measuring the weight, in grams, of the fecal material simulant that can be removed from the contact surface with the body of the absorbent compound after two minutes.

In this example, twenty different experimental absorbent composite test codes were evaluated for the amount of residual fecal material simulant on the contact surface with the body of the absorbent compound test code. Five absorbent compounds were assembled by hand for each absorbent compound test code in accordance with Table 8 below, using the descriptions of the corresponding materials listed in Table 3: Descriptions of the Materials above. Each absorbent compound was subjected to the supply of an aggression of 10 cc of fecal material simulant, as described herein, at 15 cc / s and each absorbent compound of each absorbent compound test code was analyzed according to the method of Residual test on the surface of the fecal material simulant described here.

Table 8: Experimental Absorbent Compound Test Codes: D Deebbee iinnddiiccaarrssee qquuee "" NN // AA "" ssiiggnniiffiiccaa qquuee ppaarraa eell ccóóddiiggoo test of absorbent compound in question, that particular material is not present. Thus, for example, for the Absorbent Compound Test Code 1, the assembled absorbent composites had the body-oriented material "B" (as described in Table 3) adhesively bonded to the fluid transfer layer " K "(as described in Table 3) without an additional layer of material between the two components. It is to be understood that the body oriented material "B" would be the body contact surface of the Absorbent Compound Test Code 1. In addition, as an example, the Absorbent Compound Test Code 7 is an absorbent composite assembled with the body-oriented material "B" (as described in Table 3) adhesively bonded to absorbent body "M" (as described in Table 3) without additional layers between the two components. It is to be understood that the body oriented material "B" would be the body contact surface of the Absorbent Compound Test Code 7.

With respect to the assembled absorbent composites, the body-oriented material is adhesively bonded to the body-facing surface of the fluid transfer layer or to the surface facing the body of the absorbent body, depending on the test code of absorbent compound. If present, the fluid transfer layer adheres adhesively with the absorbent body. The absorbent body is adhesively bonded to the outer coating (as described in Table 3). The absorbent compounds did not have any elastic of the legs or waist and did not have any containment flaps.

As illustrated in Figure 51, the design of the composite Absorbent has an impact on the amount of residual fecal material simulant on the surface of an absorbent compound test code. As illustrated in Figure 51, the absorbent compound test codes that did not contain an acquisition layer and a fluid transfer layer as part of their design had a lower amount of residual fecal material simulant on the surface of the surface contact with the body of the absorbent composite than the absorbent compound test codes that did not have a present acquisition layer but had a fluid transfer layer present as part of their design.

Example 7: The amount of residual fecal material on the contact surface with the body of an absorbent compound can be measured. This measurement can provide an understanding of how well a given absorbent composite design can minimize the amount of residual fecal material clustered on the surface of the contact surface with the body. The amount of waste fecal material can be determined, as described herein, by measuring the weight, in grams, of the fecal material simulant that can be removed from the contact surface with the body of the absorbent compound after two minutes.

In this example, four test codes were evaluated of different experimental absorbent compound for the amount of residual fecal material simulant on the contact surface with the body of the absorbent compound test code. Five absorbent compounds were assembled by hand for each absorbent compound test code in accordance with Table 9 below, using the descriptions of the corresponding materials listed in Table 3: Descriptions of the Materials above. Each absorbent compound was subjected to the supply of an aggression of 10 cc of fecal material simulant, as described herein, at 15 cc / s and each absorbent compound of each absorbent compound test code was analyzed according to the method of Residual test on the surface of the fecal material simulant that is described herein. TABLE 9: Test Codes of experimental absorbent: It should be noted that "N / A" means that for the code of Absorbent compound test in question, that particular material is not present. Thus, for example, for the Absorbent Compound Test Code 1, the assembled absorbent composites had the body-oriented material "D" (as described in Table 3) adhesively bonded to the fluid transfer layer " J "(as described in Table 3) without an additional layer of material between the two components. It is to be understood that the body oriented material "D" would be the body contact surface of the Absorbent Compound Test Code 1. In addition, as an example, the Absorbent Compound Test Code 3 is an absorbent composite assembled with the body-oriented material "D" (as described in Table 3) adhesively bonded to the fluid transfer layer "M" (as described in Table 3) without additional layers between the two components. It is to be understood that the body oriented material "D" would be the body contact surface of the Absorbent Compound Test Code 3.

With respect to the assembled absorbent composites, the material facing the body is adhesively bonded to the body-facing surface of the fluid transfer layer. The fluid transfer layer is adhesively bonded to the body absorbent. The absorbent body is adhesively bonded to the outer coating (as described in Table 3). The absorbent compounds did not have any elastic of the legs or waist and did not have any containment flaps.

As illustrated in Figure 52, the design of the absorbent composite has an impact on the amount of residual fecal material simulant on the surface of an absorbent compound test code. As illustrated in Figure 52, the absorbent compound test codes that had a fluid transfer layer composed of a tissue paper material or a hydroentangled material as part of their design had a lower amount of residual fecal material simulant in them. the surface of the contact surface with the body of the absorbent composite than the absorbent compound test codes that had the Scott Towel or a material having polymeric materials such as the fluid transfer layer as part of its design.

Example 8: The amount of residual fecal material on the contact surface with the body of an absorbent compound can be measured. This measurement can provide an understanding of how well a given absorbent composite design can minimize the amount of material residual fecal grouped on the surface of the contact surface with the body. The amount of waste fecal material can be determined, as described herein, by measuring the weight, in grams, of the fecal material simulant that can be removed from the contact surface with the body of the absorbent compound after two minutes.

In this example, six different experimental absorbent composite test codes were evaluated for the amount of residual fecal material simulant on the body contact surface of the absorbent compound test code. Five absorbent compounds were assembled by hand for each absorbent compound test code in accordance with Table 10 below, using the descriptions of the corresponding materials listed in Table 3: Descriptions of the Materials above. Each absorbent compound was subjected to the supply of an aggression of 10 cc of fecal simulant, as described herein, at 15 cc / s and each absorbent compound of each absorbent compound test code was analyzed according to the method of test Propagation area of the fecal material simulant described here.

Table 10: Experimental Absorbent Compound Test Codes: It should be noted that "N / A" means that for the absorbent compound test code in question, that particular material is not present. Thus, for example, for the Absorbent Compound Test Code 1, the assembled absorbent composites had the body oriented material "A" (as described in Table 3) adhesively bonded to the acquisition layer "I" (as described in Table 3) without an additional layer of material between the two components. It is to be understood that the body oriented material "A" would be the body contact surface of the Absorbent Compound Test Code 1. In addition, as an example, the Absorbent Compound Test Code 3 is an absorbent composite assembled with the "E" coating (as described in Table 3) adhesively bonded to the acquisition layer "I" (as described in Table 3). It should be understood that "E" coating would be the body contact surface of the Absorbent Compound Test Code 3.

With respect to the assembled absorbent composites, the body oriented material or the secondary coating, depending on the absorbent compound test code, is adhesively bonded to the body facing surface of the acquisition layer. The garment-facing surface of the acquisition layer is adhesively bonded to the fluid transfer layer and the fluid transfer layer is adhesively bonded to the absorbent body. The absorbent body is adhesively bonded to the outer coating (as described in Table 3). The absorbent compounds did not have any elastic of the legs or waist and did not have any containment flaps.

As illustrated in Figure 53, the design of the absorbent composite has an impact on the amount of residual fecal material simulant on the surface of an absorbent compound test code. As illustrated in Figure 53, the absorbent compound test codes with the material facing the body (Material Codes "A" and "C") as the contact surface with the body had a lower amount of fecal material simulant than the absorbent compound test codes that had the secondary coating material (Material Code "E") as the surface of contact with the body. From the information obtained in Example 2, it would be expected that the absorbent compound test codes 1, 2, 4 and 5 would also have a greater amount of residual fecal material simulant on the surface of the body contact surface. Absorbent compound test codes. However, as illustrated in Figure 53, the absorbent compound test codes 1, 2, 4 and 5, each having an acquisition layer present in its design, still had a lower amount of residual fecal material simulant. on the surface of the contact surface with the body of the absorbent compound test codes. As illustrated in Figures 50 and 53, if an acquisition layer is present in the design of the absorbent composite, the composition of the acquisition layer has an impact on the amount of residual fecal material simulant on the contact surface with the body of the absorbent compound. As illustrated in Figure 53, an acquisition layer having a smaller fiber denier may have a smaller amount of residual fecal material simulant on the contact surface with the body of a absorbent composite than absorbent composites that contain an acquisition layer with higher fiber denier as part of their design.

Example 9: The compression tests of a cycle can be performed to measure the compressive resilience of the projections in layers of single-layer projections and the double-layer body oriented materials having a support layer and a layer of projections. By using measurements of the thickness of the unsupported projection layer and the material facing the double layer body during loading and unloading, the resilience percentage can be determined.

In this example, a layer of unsupported projections and two different materials oriented towards the body were evaluated, after removal of an absorbent composite, for the percentage of resilience of the unsupported projection layer and of the material oriented to the body of double layer. Each absorbent compound was assembled by hand in accordance with Table 11 below, using the descriptions of the corresponding materials listed in Table 3: Descriptions of the Materials above. Each layer of unsupported projections and each material oriented to the double-layer body were analyzed according to the compression resilience Percentage test method of a cycle that is described in the present.

Table 11: Experimental Absorbent Compound Test Codes: With respect to the assembled absorbent compounds, the experimental coating is adhesively bonded to the body-facing surface of the absorbent body. The garment-facing surface of the absorbent body is adhesively bonded to the outer covering. The absorbent compounds did not have any elastic of the legs or waist and did not have any containment flaps.

Figure 54 illustrates the compression stress curves against the thickness of the coating under the loading and unloading of a cycle for the unsupported projection layer and the two tested materials facing the body.

The resilience percentage is calculated according to the following equation: % Resilience [(Thickness at 0.483 kPa discharge) / (Thickness at 0.483 kPa load)] x 100% Table 12 presents a summary of the coating thicknesses at 0.483 kPa during loading and unloading and the resilience percentage for the unsupported layer of projections and the two tested materials facing the body.

Table 12: Thickness of material oriented towards the body (mm) under 0.483 kPa (0.07 psi) during loading and unloading and Resilience Percentage As indicated in Table 12, and as illustrated in Figure 54, the resilience percentage of the single-layer non-carrier projection layer is about 69%. As indicated in more detail in Table 12, and as further illustrated in Figure 54, the resilience percentage of a coating, such as a projection layer having projections, can be improved by combining a layer of projections with a support layer to produce the material oriented towards the body.

Test method of compression resilience Percentage of a cycle 1. Use "unfrozen" spraying to carefully remove the unsupported coating layer or the material facing the body with the projections from an absorbent compound. 2. From the layer of projections without support or material oriented towards the body, cut a test sample of 38 mm by 25 mm. 3. Stainless steel top and bottom plates are attached to a strain gauge (Model: Alliance RT / 1 manufactured by MTS System Corporation, a company that has a place in Eden Prairie, Minnesota, United States). 4. The upper plate has a diameter of 57 mm, while the lower plate has a diameter of 89 mm. The upper stage is connected to a 100 N load cell, while the lower stage is connected to the base of the voltage meter. 5. The software program TestWorks version 4 provided by MTS is used to control the movement of the upper stage and record the load and distance between the two stages. 6. The upper stage activates to move slowly downwards and touch the lower stage until the compression load reaches approximately 5000 g. At this point, the distance between the two platens is zero. 7. The top plate is then adjusted to move up (away from the bottom plate) until the distance between the two plates reaches 15 mm. 8. The crosshead reading shown in the TestWorks software program version 4 is set to zero. 9. A test sample is placed in the center of the lower stage with the projections facing the upper stage. 10. The upper stage is activated to descend to the lower stage and compress the test sample at a speed of 25 mm / min. The distance that the upper plate moves is indicated by the crosshead reading. This is a loading process. 11. When 345 grams of force is reached (approximately 3.5 kPa), the top plate stops moving down and returns at a speed of 25 mm / min to its initial position where the distance between the two plates is 15 mm. This is a download process. 12 The compression load and the corresponding distance between the two platens during loading and unloading are recorded on a computer with the TestWorks Version 4 software program provided by MTS. 13. The compression load is converted into the compression stress by dividing the compression force by the area of the test sample. 14. The distance between the two platens at a given compression stress represents the thickness under that particular compression stress. 15. A total of three test samples are tested for each test sample code to obtain representative load and discharge curves for each test sample code.

Example 10 To measure the resistance to stretching and the associated collapse of the projections, the percentage of extension can be measured under variable loads of a layer of unsupported projections and a material oriented to the double layer body.

In this example, a layer of unsupported projections and two different material oriented towards the body were evaluated, after its removal of an absorbent compound, for the percentage of extension under variable loads of the unsupported projection layer and the material oriented towards the body. Each absorbent compound was assembled by hand in accordance with Table 13 below, using the descriptions of the corresponding materials listed in Table 3: Descriptions of the Materials above.

Each layer of unsupported projections and each body oriented material were analyzed in accordance with the Load versus Percent Extension test method described herein.

Table 13: Experimental Absorbent Compound Test Codes: With respect to the assembled absorbent composites, the unsupported projection layer or the material facing the body is adhesively bonded to the surface facing the body of the absorbent body. The garment-facing surface of the absorbent body is adhesively bonded to the outer covering. The absorbent compounds did not have any elastic of the legs or waist and did not have any containment flaps.

Figure 55 illustrates the load (N / 25 mm) against the extension percentage for the unsupported projection layer and the two tested materials oriented towards the body.

Table 14 provides a summary of the load versus the percentage extension of the unsupported projection layer and the two tested materials facing the body.

Table 14: Load (N / 25 mm) against% Extension to Various Loads As illustrated in Figure 55 and as summarized in Table 14, at a given load, the elongation percentage of a material facing the double layer body is less than that of a single layer layer of projections without support . This demonstrates the benefit of incorporating a support layer in a material facing the body to provide support for the projection layer of the material facing the body. The double-layer body-oriented material can have an improved resistance to stretching and a maintenance of the height of the projections of material oriented towards the body.

Test Method Traction Force against Percentage of Tension by Traction 1. Use "unfrozen" spraying to carefully remove the unsupported coating layer or the material facing the body with the projections from an absorbent compound. 2. Once the unsupported layer of projections or the material facing the body is removed from the absorbent compound, a test sample 25 mm wide by 150 mm long is cut from the unsupported projection layer or from the oriented material the body. The direction of the length of the test sample is the machine direction of the unsupported projection layer or the material facing the body and the absorbent composite. 3. The test sample is clamped between two jaws of the Load test equipment versus percent extension (Model: Alliance RT / 1 manufactured by MTS System Corporation, a company that has a place in Eden Prairie, Minnesota, United States). The initial separation between the two jaws is 125 mm.

Four . The upper jaw is activated to move out of the lower jaw at a speed of 3.75 cm / min. 5. The upper jaw moves about 38 mm before stop 6. The percentage of extension against the load curve is recorded on a computer with the software program TestWorks Version 4 provided by MTS. 7. A total of three samples are analyzed for each test sample to obtain an average curve.

Example 11 The admission and rewetting of absorbent compounds for feminine hygiene and commercially available products using simulated menstruation can be evaluated as described herein.

In this example, three different body-oriented materials and two commercially available feminine hygiene products were evaluated for their admission and rewet capabilities. Each experimental feminine pad absorbent composite was assembled by hand in accordance with Table 15 below, using the descriptions of the corresponding materials listed in Table 3: Descriptions of the Materials above. Each body oriented material and absorbent composite was analyzed according to the Admission / Rewet test method described herein by the use of menstruation simulant as described herein. With respect to the assembled absorbent composites, the material oriented towards the body joins adhesive to the body facing surface of the acquisition layer. The adhesive is applied, in a width of 1.5 to 2 inches to the central part of the material facing the body, to the support layer of the material facing the body (ie, the side without projections of the material facing the body) . The surface of the garment in front of the acquisition layer is adhesively bonded to the absorbent body.

Table 15: Experimental Feminine Pad Absorbent Compound Test Codes: Test Codes 4 and 5 are material codes, Q and R, respectively, as described in Table 3: Descriptions of the Materials above. Each of the commercially available products was analyzed according to the Admission / Rewet test method described herein by the use of menstruation simulant as described herein.

Table 16 presents a summary of the admission and rewet values for the three tested materials oriented to the body and the two commercially available products tested.

Table 16: Admission / Rewet values: As summarized in Table 16, the second admission time is shorter and, therefore, faster than the commercially available products. This indicates that the material facing the body can capture the fluid faster and can decrease the probability of leakage caused by the slow capture of fluid by commercially available products. Typically, admission times are improved at the expense of the amount of rewet. In this case, although the second feeding time is faster with the materials facing the body, no increase in the amount of rewetting is found compared to commercial products.

Preparation of the menstruation simulant: The menstrual simulant was prepared by using the blood of porcines and egg white with chicken eggs by the following protocol published on IP.com on August 6, 2010, reference number IPCOM000198395D. This procedure is a batch process that can produce 2.5 L to 4.0 L of liquid. The menstruation simulator can be purchased from Cocalico Biologicals, Reamstown PA. 1. Apparatus: 1. 1. Agitator and support 1. 2. Rod shaker with 3"diameter flat blade 1. 3. 3L reaction vessel 1. 4. Plastic strainer 1. 5. Centrifugal Preparatory 1. 6. Centrifuge of hematocrit 1. 7. Motorized pipette 2. Materials and supplies: 2. 1 Fresh jumbo chicken eggs 2. 2 Defibrinated swine blood 2. 3 defibrinated porcine plasma 2. 4 Parafilm 2. 5 Microhematocrit capillary tubes 2. 6 Critoseal Sealer (Oxford Labware) 3 . Protocol 3. 1. The collection, separation and processing of thick egg white. 3. 1.1. By using fresh jumbo chicken eggs, one at a time, remove the egg from its shell and place it in a fixed yolk separator at the edge of a 250 ml beaker. Allow the egg white to pass through the yolk separator and into the 250 ml beaker, and then discard the yolk. Remove any chalaza from the egg white with a rounded soup spoon and transfer the egg white to a 600 ml beaker. This process is continued until the 12 eggs are processed and collected in the 600 ml beaker. 3. 1.2. Transfer the egg whites from the 12 eggs into the plastic filter / collection bowl and allow the thin egg white to drain through the filter into the collection container for 10 minutes. Tilt the filter bowl from side to side, every 3-4 minutes during this process to facilitate the draining of the thin egg white. Discard the thin egg white. 3. 1.3. Place a clean collection container under the filter container containing the retained thick egg white and, with the back of a soup spoon, press the thick egg white through the openings in the filter bowl and into the container of collection. 3. 1.4. Place the coarse egg white processed in a beaker of 1.5 or 2 L. 3. 1.5. Repeat the treatment of the 12 eggs until enough thick egg white is collected. 3. 2. Preparation of porcine blood plasma 3. 2.1. Pour swine blood in a plastic centrifuge bucket of 750 ml (500 ml maximum in each cuvette) and place the cuvettes in the carriers. Centrifuge cups should be filled in pairs. 3. 2.2. Carefully balance the pairs of cuvettes, in their carriers, on a beam scale by transferring blood from one cuvette to another. Next, place the cubes and carriers in the centrifuge. 3. 2.3. Centrifuge the equilibrated cuvettes at 3500 rpm for 60 minutes at room temperature. 3. 2.4. Carefully remove the plasma from each cuvette using a 10-ml pipette and a pipette motor and place it in a 1-L beaker. Keep the tip of the pipette at least 5 mm above the layer of red blood cells packaged to prevent aspiration of red blood cells and plasma contamination. 3. 2.5. Alternatively, defibrinated porcine plasma can be purchased from Cocalico Biologicals, Inc. 3. 2.5.1. If purchased plasma is used, place the plasma in the 750 ml centrifuge cuvettes and balance the cuvettes, as described above. 3. 2.5.2. Centrifuge the plasma at 3500 rpm for 30 minutes at room temperature. This procedure will separate the plasma from any precipitate that may be present. 3. 2.5.3. Decant the clarified plasma by carefully pouring the liquid into a 1 L beaker.

Preparation of packaged porcine red blood cells 3. 2.6. Follow the above procedure for the preparation of porcine blood plasma. 3. 2.7. Remove the remaining plasma supernatant from each cuvette containing packed red blood cells and a thin layer of plasma with a 10 ml pipette as described in section 4.2.4 above. 3. 2.8. A thin beige layer of white blood cells (known as the "buffy coat") remains on top of the layer of red blood cells. Remove this layer by aspiration as described in section 5 below. 3. 3. Mix the processed egg white and blood plasma. 3. 3.1. Pour a volume of thick egg white processed into the 3 L reaction vessel. This volume can be between 1000 ml and 1600 ml. 3. 3.2. Pour a volume of porcine blood plasma into the 3 L reaction vessel. This volume should equal 75% of the volume of the thick egg white. 3. 3.3. Shake the mixture briefly (10-20 seconds) with a large rubber spatula. 3. 3.4. Lower the 3"diameter flat agitator disc into the mixture, stirring the disc in the reaction vessel and being 5 inches below the surface of the mixture. 3. 3.5. Turn on the agitator, adjust the agitator speed to 1000 rpm, and stir the mixture for 1 hour. 3. 3.6. Stop the agitator and remove the rod and disc. 3. 3.7. By using a rubber spatula, remove any foam that may form on the surface of the mixture during agitation. 3. 3.8. Transfer the combined mixture to a 3-4 L beaker. 3. 4. Addition and mixing of packed red blood cells 3. 4.1. Measure the hematocrit of packed red blood cells by using the procedure described in section 5 below. 3. 4.2. Calculate the amount of packed red blood cells that is added to the egg white / plasma mixture by using one of the following equations. 3. 4.2.1. If the packed cells are added by volume, use the following equation to calculate that volume: 0. 3 x volume (egg white / plasma) Volume pRBC = Hematocrit (pRBC) - 0.3 3. 4.2.2. If the packed cells are added by weight, use the following equation to calculate the weight: , _ 0.321 x grams (egg white / plasma) Grams of pRBC = - - H -emato-crito - (p -RBC -) - 0-.3 - - 3.4.3. Add the calculated amount of packed red blood cells to the egg white / plasma mixture and mix with a rubber spatula for 1 minute. 3. 5. Filling of Fenwal storage bags. 3. 5.1. Cut the access tube in the Fenwal storage bags to a length of approximately 24 inches. 3. 5.2. Join the cut end of the storage bag tube to the outlet of a large plastic beaker. 3. 5.3. Pour the required volume of liquid into the funnel and let the fluid fill the bag by gravity. 3. 5.4. By using a large syringe, remove all air bubbles from the bag. 3. 5.5 Measure the hematocrit of the contents of the bag by using the procedure described in section 5 below. 3. 5.6. Seal the bag by attaching a double knot in the tube approximately 2 to 3 inches from the bag, or use the staples of Fenwal metal tubes, and cut off the excess tube. 4. Hematocrit tests: 4. 1. Ensure that the blood or simulant to be tested is at room temperature and mix well. 4. 2. Place a small aliquot (0.1 to 0.2 ml) of the fluid to be tested in a small cup or on a piece of Parafilm. 4., then follow a pause of 2 minutes, 55 seconds, followed by a 3 ml drip (0.3 ml / min), and then a second 2 ml jet (24 ml / min). The menstruation simulant is administered through a cannula 404 in a speed block 400 which is placed in the center of the crotch of the test product. The speed block 400 is made of a non-electrostatic material called Ertalyte. This material allows the simulator to pass along its surface without attracting it. The opening 402 is oval in shape and measures 60 mm long (L3) X 13 mm wide (W3) with its ends 404 consisting of 4 mm diameter semicircles. As shown in Figure 56 and Figure 56A, cannula 404 is inserted through a small central hole 406 that travels in the upper part of speed block 400 to allow cannula 404 to be at an angle with respect to the oval opening 402 and to allow that the fluid is applied through the center of the oval opening 402 of the speed block 400.

The first and second intake values are measured with a stopwatch during the first and second stream of 2 mi, respectively. The stopwatch starts when the jet starts and stops when the fluid from the jet is completely absorbed by the absorbent compound. The rewet values are determined after the complete penetration of the second 2 ml jet. To measure the rewet values, two pieces of blotting paper (grade Verigood, white, 300 g / m2, 48.26 by 60.96 cm, 250 sheets per ream, number 411-01-12, from Georgia-Pacific Corp, or equivalent) are placed. ) to cover the absorbed compound assaulted. A foot covering the absorbent compound is lowered against the blotting paper to create a pressure load of 1.0 psi for 3 minutes and the amount of liquid transferred to the blotting paper is determined gravimetrically. The pressure used in this test is shown to correlate well with the pressure applied to the pads for feminine hygiene during use.

For the purposes of brevity and conciseness, any range of values detailed in this description contemplates all the values within the range and should be understood as supporting the claims that establish any subinterval with valuation criteria that are values whole numbers within the specified range in question. By way of a hypothetical example, a description of a range from 1 to 5 will be considered to support claims of any of the following ranges: 1 to 5; 1 to 4; 1 to 3; 1 to 2; 2 to 5; 2 to 4; 2 to 3; 3 to 5; 3 to 4; and 4 to 5.

The dimensions and values disclosed in the present description should not be understood as strictly limited to the exact numerical values established. Instead, unless otherwise specified, each of these dimensions will mean both the aforementioned value and a functionally equivalent range that includes that value. For example, a dimension described as "40 mm" will mean "approximately 40 mm".

All documents cited in the Detailed Description are incorporated, in their majority, in the present description by reference; It should not be construed that the citation of any document is an admission that it represents the prior state of the art with respect to the present invention. To the extent that any meaning or definition of a term in this written document conflicts with any meaning or definition of the term in a document incorporated by reference, the meaning or definition assigned to the term in this document shall prevail.

Written document While specific embodiments of the present invention have been illustrated and described, it would be apparent to those skilled in the art that various other changes and modifications may be made without departing from the spirit or scope of the invention. Accordingly, attempts have been made to cover in the appended claims all changes and modifications that are within the scope of this invention.

It is noted that in relation to this date, the best method known to the applicant to carry out the aforementioned invention, is that which is clear from the present description of the invention.

Claims

CLAIMS Having described the invention as above, the content of the following claims is claimed as property:

1. An absorbent article characterized in that it comprises: a body-oriented material that includes a first major surface and a second major surface, the second major surface that is opposite the first major surface; an outer coating impervious to liquids; and an absorbent body including a body-facing surface, a garment-facing surface, a first longitudinal side edge, and a second longitudinal side edge, the second longitudinal side edge that is opposite the first longitudinal side edge, the oriented material towards the body that at least partially envelops the absorbent body so that the material facing the body is positioned on at least a portion of the surface facing the body of the absorbent body, extends around at least one of the first longitudinal side edge and the second longitudinal side edge of the absorbent body, and extends below at least a portion of the garment-facing surface of the absorbent body, wherein at less a portion of the body facing material extending below the garment-facing surface of the absorbent body contacts the surface facing the body of the liquid impervious outer covering.

2. An absorbent article characterized in that it comprises: a body oriented material including a first major surface and a second major surface, the second major surface that is opposite the first major surface, a plurality of projections extending from one of the first major surface and the second major surface; an outer coating impervious to liquids; and an absorbent body including a body-facing surface, a garment-facing surface, a first longitudinal side edge, and a second longitudinal side edge, the second longitudinal side edge that is opposite the first longitudinal side edge, the oriented material towards the body that at least partially envelops the absorbent body so that the material facing the body is positioned on at least a portion of the surface facing the body of the absorbent body, extends around at least one of the first longitudinal side edge and the second longitudinal side edge of the absorbent body, and extends below at least a portion of the garment-facing surface of the absorbent body.

3. The absorbent article according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the material facing the body includes a first portion and a second portion, the first portion being separated from the second portion.

4. The absorbent article according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the material facing the body is folded on itself at least one of the longitudinal side edges of the absorbent body so that a first portion of the second major surface of the material oriented towards the body contacts a second portion of the second main surface of the material facing the body.

5. The absorbent article according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the material facing the body is attached to the outer coating impermeable to liquids.

6. The absorbent article according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that it further comprises a separating layer positioned between the garment facing surface of the absorbent body and the liquid impervious outer covering.

7. The absorbent article according to claim 6, characterized in that at least a portion of the separating layer is positioned between the material facing the body extending below the garment facing surface of the absorbent body and the outer coating impermeable to the absorbent body. the liquids.

8. The absorbent article according to claim 1, characterized in that the body-oriented material includes a plurality of projections extending from one of the first major surface and the second major surface.

9. The absorbent article according to claim 2 or 8, characterized in that at least some of the plurality of projections are hollow.

10. The absorbent article according to claim 9, characterized in that the material facing the body further comprises a support layer and a layer of projections, the support layer comprising opposite first and second surfaces, the layer of projections comprising a plurality of fibers and opposing inner and outer surfaces, the second surface of the support layer in contact with the inner surface of the projection layer; the plurality of projections that are formed from a first plurality of fibers in the projection layer, the plurality of projections extending from the outer surface of the projection layer in a direction away from the support layer.

11. The absorbent article according to claim 2 or 8, characterized in that the material facing the body further comprises a contact area, the plurality of projections that have less than about 1% open area and the contact area that has more than about 1% open area within a selected area of the material facing the body.

12. The absorbent article according to claim 2 or 8, characterized in that it further comprises a first containment fin and a second containment fin, wherein at least a portion of the material facing the body extends below a distal end of the first containment fin and a distal end of the second containment fin, at least the only portion of the material facing the body that extends below the distal end of the first containment fin and the second containment fin that includes at least some of the plurality of projections.

13. The absorbent article according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the material facing the body includes a front area of the attached waist, a rear area of the attached waist, and a central area of the sides, each of the front area of the waist joined and the rear area of the attached waist comprising a greater surface area for coupling the material facing the body to the outer coating impermeable to liquids than a surface area for Attach the material facing the body to the outer coating impervious to liquids in the central area of the sides.

14. The absorbent article according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the material facing the body includes a front area of the attached waist, a rear area of the attached waist, and a central area of the sides, the central area of the sides that include less adhesive to attach the material facing the body to the outer covering than in the front area of the attached waist and the rear area of the attached waist.

15. An absorbent article characterized in that it comprises: a material oriented towards the body; an outer coating impervious to liquids; an absorbent body including a surface facing the body, a surface facing the garment, a first longitudinal side edge, and a second longitudinal side edge, the absorbent body disposed between the material facing the body and the outer covering; Y a first fluid transfer layer including a first major surface and a second major surface and a plurality of projections extending from one of the first major surface and the second major surface, the first main surface facing the second main surface, the first fluid transfer layer that at least partially envelops the absorbent body so that the first fluid transfer layer is positioned on at least a first portion of the surface oriented towards the body of the absorbent body, extends around the first longitudinal side edge of the absorbent body, and extends below at least a first portion of the garment-facing surface of the absorbent body.

16. The absorbent article according to claim 15, characterized in that it further comprises: a second fluid transfer layer, the second fluid transfer layer including a third major surface and a fourth major surface, the third major surface facing to the fourth main surface, the second fluid transfer layer that at least partially envelops the absorbent body so that the second transfer layer of fluid is positioned on at least a second portion of the surface facing the body of the absorbent body, extends around the second longitudinal side edge of the absorbent body, and extends below at least a second portion of the surface facing the garment of the absorbent body, the second fluid transfer layer including a plurality of projections extending from one of the third major surface and the fourth major surface.

17. The absorbent article according to claim 15, characterized in that at least some of the plurality of projections of the first fluid transfer layer are hollow.

18. The absorbent article according to claim 15, characterized in that the first fluid transfer layer comprises, in addition, a support layer and a layer of projections, the support layer comprising opposite first and second surfaces, the layer of projections that it comprises a plurality of fibers and opposite inner and outer surfaces, the second surface of the support layer in contact with the inner surface of the projection layer, and a plurality of projections extending from the outer surface of the projection layer in an address that moves away from the support layer, and where the plurality of projections are formed from a first plurality of fibers in the projection layer.

19. The absorbent article according to claim 15, characterized in that it further comprises: a secondary coating positioned between the material facing the body and the absorbent body.

20. The absorbent article according to claim 15, characterized in that the first fluid transfer layer is further configured so that the first fluid transfer layer is positioned over substantially the entire surface facing the body of the absorbent body and is extends around the second longitudinal side edge of the absorbent body.

21. The absorbent article according to claim 15, characterized in that the first fluid transfer layer includes a front area of the attached waist, a rear area of the attached waist, and a central area of the sides, each of the front area of the joined waist and the rear area of the joined waist comprising a greater surface area for coupling the first fluid transfer layer to the liquid impervious outer coating than a surface area for coupling the first fluid transfer layer to the outer coating impermeable to liquids in the central area of the sides.

22. The absorbent article according to claim 15, characterized in that the first fluid transfer layer includes a front area of the attached waist, a rear area of the attached waist, and a central area of the sides, the central area of the sides which includes less adhesive for coupling the first fluid transfer layer to the outer coating than in the front area of the attached waist and the rear area of the attached waist.

23. The absorbent article according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the material facing the body is positioned on the entire surface facing the body of the absorbent body.

24. The absorbent article according to claim 10, characterized in that the layer of projections and the support layer of the material facing the body are entangled by fluid.

25. The absorbent article according to claim 10, characterized in that a second plurality of fibers of the projection layer are entangled with the support layer.

26. The absorbent article according to claim 18, characterized in that the projection layer and the support layer of the first fluid transfer layer are entangled by fluid.

27. The absorbent article according to claim 18, characterized in that a second plurality of fibers of the projection layer are entangled with the support layer. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An absorbent article that has a better handling of body exudates. The absorbent article can minimize the amount of body exudates in contact with the skin of the wearer and can minimize the incidence of leakage of body exudates from the absorbent article.